Skip to main content

Full text of "Elements of interpretation"

See other formats


M9-NRLF 


^B  Bt,3  3^^ 


III     ^-  OF   THE 


Ja/-^ 


j  I Al  BANCROFTS 


k.;^     r    V 


K^., 


rf.      ^Ay  . 


'^.^^^•-    'S^^^t^:x^^c    ^/z^ey.UPl^yS.y''^. 


L-'t^Pt^^iu  ^^l^^-^jt-.**^   U^-t^,c^^.<' 

ELEMENTS  OF  INTERPRETATION 


TRANSLATEj^^ROJJ      THE.  LATMC  OF 

J,  A.  E^^ESTI 
// 


ACCOMPANIED  BY  NOTES  ; 


WITH  AN  APPENDIX  CONTAINING  EXTRACTS  FROM  MORUS 
BECK    AND    KEIL 


By  MOSES  STUART 
Associate  Prof,  of  Sac.  Lit,  in  the  TheoL  Seminary  at  Andovev 


ANDOVER : 

FLAGG  AND  GOULD,  PRINTERS, 

1822. 


PREFACE. 


1  HE  publication  of  the  following  work,  in  its  present  form, 
originated  from  the  want  of  a  text-book,  in  our  country,  on  the 
science  of  interpretation.  But  few  copies  of  Ernesti's  Institutio 
Interpretis  have  yet  been  imported  ;  and  the  Library  of  the  The- 
ological Seminary,  with  which  the  Translator  is  connected,  con- 
tains by  far  too  few  for  classic  use  among  the  students. 

The  importance  of  regular  scientific  instruction  in  the  Princi- 
ples of  Interpretation,  has  been  long  acknowledged,  by  the  best 
Biblical  and  classical  scholars  of  Europe.  A  multitude  of  books 
within  a  few  years  have  been  published,  with  a  view  to  present 
a  regular  digest  of  the  principles  and  rules  of  Hermeneutics.  Of 
these,  some  are  much  too  copious  to  admit  of  publication  in  our 
country.  Others  are  mere  text  books  of  particular  lecturers, 
and  formed  upon  a  plan  not  adapted  to  our  circumstances.  The 
work  of  Ernesti,  now  re-published,  has  been  through  several  edi- 
tions in  Europe,  and  has  been  more  extensively  used  as  a  class- 
book,  than  any  publication  of  this  nature. 

It  may  be  asked,  why  it  is  not  now  republished  in  the  original 
form.  My  reasons  for  making  an  English  translation  are,  (1) 
That  the  original  Latin,  though  sufficiently  pure  in  respect  to  the 
choice  of  words,  is  arranged  very  much  according  to  the  idiom 
of  the  German  language,  the  vernacular  tongue  of  Ernesti.  It  is 
therefore  difficult  to  be  understood  by  any  young  man,  who  has 
read  Latin  only  in  the  Roman  Classics.  (2)  Repeated  trials,  by 
using  the  work  as  printed  in  Latin  for  a  class  book,  have  satisfied 
me  that  comparatively  little  profit  is  gained  in  reading  it,  by  most 
who  are  entering  upon  their  theological  studies.  For  the  work  is 
not  only  difficult,  but  from  its  brevity  and  technical  form,  it  soon 
becomes  dry  and  uninteresting  to  a  beginner.  (3)  I  wished  to  add 
some  explanations  for  the  sake  of  perspicuity,  and  if  possible, 
of  creating  additional  interest  in  the  study  of  interpretation.  (4) 
An  edition  in  Latin,  with  the  mere  text,  would  hardly  meet  with 
sale  enough  to  defray  the  necessary  expenses  of  publication. 

The  edition,  from  which  I  have  made  the  translation,  is  that 
published  at  Leipsic,  in  A.  D.  1809,  and  edited  by  Dr.  Aramon, 
who  has  interspersed  many  notes  of  his  own.  Of  these  I  have 
made  but  little  use.  My  reason  for  this  is,  that  I  did  not  regard 
them  as  being  of  much  value.  Besides,  they  not  unfrequently 
partake  of  the  extravagancies  of  the  author  ;  who,  in  his  Preface, 
among  various  improvements  recounted  by  him  as  introduced 
since  the  time  of  Ernesti,  mentions  one,  which  may  serve  as  a  spe- 
cimen of  many  others  ;  viz.  that  when  Jesus  is  said  by  the  Evan- 


IV  PREFACE. 

gelist  to  have  walked  upon  the  sea^  the  interpreter  can  new  give 
the  real  uieaning;,  which  is,  that  he  wAded  as  far  as  the  shoal  ua- 
ter  would  permit^  and  after  that  began  to  swim. 

I  do  not  deny  that  Dr.  Ammon  is  learned ;  but  that  sobriety 
and  discretion,  which  are  the  first  characteristics  of  a  good  inter- 
preter. I  am  unable  to  find  in  him  ;  at  least  to  such  a  degree  as 
to  make  his  opinions  worthy  of  special  consideration. 

Besides  ;  !  have  found  a  much  better  commentator  on  Ernesti, 
from  whose  labours  I  have  reaped  great  advantage.  I  refer  to 
Morus  ;  whose  Hermeneuiica  is  a  system  of  Lectures  on  Inter- 
pretation, of  which  Ernesti's  Institutioia  the  basis  or  text-book. 
This  work  of  Morus  I  prize  so  highly,  that  (  have,  at  the  close 
of  almost  every  Section  of  Ernesti,  referred  to  the  corresponding 
part,  in  his  Commentator.  The  notes  which  I  have  added  to  the 
work,  contain,  for  the  most  part,  a  summary  of  what  Morus  has 
said.  For  the  fidelity  of  this  summary,  and  for  the  matter  of 
some  of  the  notes,  specially  of  the  longer  ones,  I  am  responsible. 
The  notes  are  distinguished  from  the  text,  by  being  printed  in 
smaller  type.     Any  more  distinction  was  thought  unneceissary. 

Morus  is  an  author  too  copious  for  republication  in  our  coun- 
try, but  may  easily  be  imported.  The  Student  cannot  fail  to 
read  him  with  great  profit.  The  Latin  is  uncommonly  easy  ;  and, 
if  I  may  judge  by  ray  own  feelings,  very  pure  and  classical.  1 
would  earnestly  recommend  it  to  every  student,  to  compare  Mo- 
rus with  Ernesti,  in  all  the  places  where  reference  in  the  follow- 
ing work  is  made  to  him. 

The  works  of  Keil,  Beck,  and  Seller,  to  which  reference  is 
made  at  the  head  of  most  of  the  chapters,  are  very  useful  Manu- 
als of  the  Science  of  Interpretation,  and  can  be  procured  at  a 
very  moderate  expense.  In  point  of  arrangement,  and  in  the  ex- 
clusion of  matter  which  does  not  belong  to  the  proper  province 
of  Hermeneutics,  they  have  some  advantages  over  Ernesti.  I 
believe,  however,  that  Ernesti  has  exhibited  the  essential  part  of 
the  science  in  question,  more  fundamentally,  and  in  a  more  con- 
vincing and  instructive  way,  than  either  of  these  authors.  Still, 
as  they  are  more  recent,  and  have  been  much  used  by  those  who 
study  interpretation,  I  thought  it  might  be  acceptable  to  refer  to 
them. 

Other  books  are  occasionally  referred  to,  but  not  often,  with 
the  exception  of  Morus.  It  would  have  been  easy  to  add  a  mul- 
titude of  references  to  books,  on  every  subject,  and  every  ramifi- 
cation of  subjects,  throughout  the  work.  But  I  am  not  persuad- 
ed of  the  utility  of  this  method,  with  beginners.  The  mind  is 
overwhelmed  with  the  endless  task,  which  the  reading  of  so  ma- 
ny writers  would  occasion.  There  may  be  a  shew  of  learning 
in  a  writer,  who  makes  his  references  so  copious;  but  the  real 
profit  to  the  student  is  comparatively  small.  A  few  oi  the  best 
books  are  of  more  importance  than  the  undistinguished  mass, 


which  presents  a  mere  catalogue  of  what  has  been  published. 
Beck  is  not  free  from  this  fault;  and  even  Keil  has  not  made  his 
*'  select  literature"  sufficiently  select. 

My  reasons  for  omitting  some  parts  of  the  original  work  of  Er- 
nesti,  are  stated  at  the  end  of  the  Introduction,  It  is  sufficient 
here  merely  to  say,  that  as  Ernesti's  work  was  one  of  the  first 
respectable  efforts,  to  reduce  the  principles  of  interpretation  to 
a  science,  it  is  not  a  matter  of  any  surprise,  that  he  has  included 
in  it  much  more  than  appropriately  belongs  to  this  subject.  Sub- 
sequent writers  hare  marked  out  the  limits  of  the  science,  with 
more  accuracy.  I  have  omitted  what  is  now  commonly  omitted, 
in  works  of  this  nature. 

There  are  some  topics,  belonging  to  Hermeneutics,  on  which 
the  work  of  Ernesti  has  not  touched.  I  have  omitted  them  in 
this  work,  because  it  is  not  my  object  to  appear  as  an  original 
writer  here,  on  these  subjects.  It  is  proper  however  to  say,  that 
the  topics  omitted  are  much  less  the  subject  of  precept  or  rule, 
than  those  inserted  ;  and  that  the  principles  of  several  of  them 
are  very  far  from  being  settled,  to  the  satisfaction  of  critics. 
What  is  most  useful  will  be  found  in  Ernesti.  The  rest  experi- 
ence will  supply  ;  or  the  iustructer,  who  uses  Ernesti,  and  con- 
sults the  books  referred  to,  will  be  able  to  give  the  student  some 
adequate  views  of  them.  As  my  duty  leads  me  to  read  lectures 
in  this  department  of  science,  to  those  whom  I  am  called  to  ia-"^ 
struct,  it  will  be  my  aim,  so  far  as  I  am  able,  to  supply  deficien- 
cies of  this  nature  ;  in  order  that  no  topic  may  be  neglected, 
which  may  be  useful  to  those,  who  are  beginning  the  study  of 
interpretation. 

To  PART  III.  of  this  work,  which  treats  of  translating  from  one 
language  into  another,  I  have  added  the  greater  part  (#f  an  excel- 
lent Dissertation  of  Morus,  which  comprises  liiis  topic.  In  or- 
der to  do  this,  I  have  omitted  a  part  of  the  chapter  in  Ernesti, 
pertaining  to  this  subject;  as  I  thought  it  far  less  useful,  than 
what  is  inserted  from  iMorus. 

Part  iv.  contains  a  summary  of  the  laws  of  criticism,  which 
are  to  regulate  the  judgment  of  those,  who  form  opinions  about 
the  genuine  text  of  the  Scriptures.  Exceptions  might  be  made 
to  some  of  these  laws  ;  but  I  have  not  thought  them  of  sufficient 
importance  to  be  urged  here,  where  every  thing  is  designed  to 
be  a  mere  summary  of  general  Maxims.  Beck  has  given  a  more 
brief  view  of  the  subject  of  criticism,  than  I  have  been  able  else- 
where to  find  ;  and  the  Biblical  student  should  not  be  altogether 
ignorant  of  it,  as  cases  of  controversy  may  arise  about  the  text, 
where  ignorance  of  this  nature  would  subject  him  to  serious  dis- 
advantages. 

Fart  v.  consists  of  a  chapter  from  Keil,  on  the  Qaalificalions 
of  an  Interpreter.  It  is  so  much  more  brief  and  comprehensive 
than  the  corresponding  chapter  in  Ernesti,  that  I  could  not  hesi- 


VI 


PREFACE. 


tate  to  prefer  it.  A  list  of  some  of  the  best  books,  on  the  topics 
to  which  the  chapter  adverts,  will  be  found  at  the  close  of  the  re- 
spective Sections. 

In  regard  to  the  manner  of  the  following  Translation,  it  may- 
be proper  to  state  here,  that  my  first  attempt  was  to  make  a  close 
version  of  Ernesti,  and  publish  it  in  this  simple  form.  I  proceed- 
ed through  the  work  of  translating,  with  this  design  in  view. 
When  1  began  to  review  my  labour,  I  found  that  there  was  so 
much  of  Latinism  in  it ;  the  sentences  were  so  long  and  involv- 
ed ;  the  connecting  particles  and  words  of  this  nature  so  few  and  in- 
definite ;  and  the  form  in  general  so  technical  and  uninviting,  that 
I  abandoned  the  design  of  publishing  it  in  this  way  ;  renewed 
my  work  of  translating  ;  broke  up  sentences,  or  sections  as  be- 
came necessary  for  the  sake  of  perspicuity  ;  supplied  connect- 
ing words  where  they  seemed  to  be  wanting;  added  parts  of  sen- 
tences for  the  sake  of  explanation,  and  in  a  few  cases,  whole  sen- 
tences and  even  paragraphs  have  been  added  for  the  sake  of  ex- 
planation or  connexion.  I  have  not  wittingly  changed  or  per- 
verted the  sentiment^  in  any  case  ;  but  1  have  taken  the  liberties 
of  a  free  translator,  who  is  more  concerned  to  make  his  book 
perspicuous  and  useful,  than  to  represent  the  exact  style  and  man- 
ner of  his  Original. 

Instead  of  the  subdivision  of  Sections  under  each  chapter  in  Er- 
nesti, they  are  here  numbered  continuously  through  the  work ; 
which  is  by  far  the  most  convenient  method.  The  titles  of  the 
parts  and  chapters  have  also  received  some  alteration. 

After  all,  such  is  the  excessive  difficulty  of  putting  English 
costume  upon  Ernesti,  that  I  cannot  flatter  myself  that  the  book 
does  not  still  contain  many  Latinisms,  which  may  be  unpleasant 
to  a  reader,  who  is  not  acquainted  with  the  original.  Q^uod  pot^ 
ui^fecL  Without  absolutely  abandoning  the  idea  of  being  a  trans- 
lator, and  making  a  new  book,  I  could  not  in  general  well  do 
more  than  I  have  done. 

At  the  commencement  of  each  Section  of  the  text,  I  have  pTa- 
ced  a  very  brief  notice  of  the  Contents  ;  which,  for  convenience 
to  the  reader,  in  order  to  find  easily  any  subject  after  which  he  is 
seeking,  has  been  printed  in  Italics.  These  summaries  belong 
not  to  the  original  work  ;  I  am  respnosible  for  them. 

If  the  Manual  shall  prove  to  be  intelligible  and  useful,  my  wish- 
es and  highest  expectations  will  be  gratified.  It  is  possible,  if  this 
endeavour  to  promote  a  knowledge  of  the  science  of  Interpretation 
should  meet  with  approbation,  it  may  excite  an  efibrt  on  my  part, 
at  some  future  period,  to  give  the  whole  work  a  new  form,  more 
specially  adapted  to  the  circumstances  of  this  country.  At  pres- 
ent, official  duties  are  too  numerous  and  urgent,  to  admit  of  such 
an   effort. 

M.  STUART. 

Andover,    Theol^  Seminary^  Jan.  22.  1822. 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 
Introduction         .  .         •         .        .        .         1 

Part  I.  general  principles  of  language. 
Chap.  I.  Of  the  meaning  of  words             .         .         7 
Chap.  II.  Of  the  kinds  of  words,  and  their  vari- 
ous use 21 

Part  II.  rules  of  interpretation. 
Chap.  I.  Introductory  Remarks       ...         32 
Chap.  II.    On  finding  the  usus  loquendi  in  the  dead 

languages       ......         34 

Chap.  111.  Subsidiary  means  of  finding  the  usus 

loquendi  .  .  .  .  .  .  45 

Chap.  IV.  On   finding  the   usus  loquendi  of  the 

New  Testament 56 

Chap.  V.  Rules  in  respect  to  tropical  language     71 
Chap.  VI    Rules  respecting  emphasis  .         93 

Chap.  VII.  On  reconciling  apparent  discrepancies  89 

Part  III.  on  translating. 
Maxims  to  be  observed  by  a  translator  .        91 

appendix. 

Morus^  on  the  general  principles  of  translating  100 

Beck^  on  the  general  principles  of  criticism  111 

Keil^  on  the  qualifications  of  an  interpreter  119 


INTRODUCTION. 


OF  INTERPRETATION    IN  GENERAL. 


{With  this  introductory  chapter,  may  be  compared  Keil,  Herm- 
eneutica,  pp.  1 — 14.  Beck,  Monogramm.  Herm.  pp.  1 — 22. 
Seller,  Hermeneutik,  H  9 — Jl.] 

§  1.  JVecessity  and  utility  (if  it.  The  interpretation  of 
the  sacred  books  is  the  highest  and  most  difficult  task 
of  the  theologian.  This  may  be  shown  from  the  na- 
ture of  the  case,  from  experience,  and  also  from  the 
consent  of  all  enlightened  periods.  All  solid  knowl- 
edge and  judicious  defence  of  divine  truth,  must  origi- 
nate from  a  right  understanding  and  accurate  interpre- 
tation of  the  Scriptures.  The  purity  of  the  Christian 
religion  has  shone  brighter  or  been  obscured,  in  pro- 
portion as  the  study  of  sacred  interpretation  has  flour- 
ished or  decayed. 

Finally,  those  have  always  been  reckoned  as  the 
most  distinguished  theologians,  who  have  excelled  in 
this  kind  of  learning.  (Compare  Morus,  Hermeneuti- 
ca,  p.  3.  I.) 

As  Christian  doctrine  is  preserved  only  in  written  records,  the 
interpretation  of  these  is  absolutely  essential  to  a  knowledge  of 
it ;  and  unless  we  know  what  Christianity  is,  we  can  neither 
maintain  its  purity  nor  defend  its  principles,  to  the  best  advan- 
tage. 

§  2.  Difficulties  attending  interpretation.  The  science 
of  interpretation  in  general  is  difficult ;  because  it  re- 
quires much  learning,  judgment,  and  diligence.  Not 
unfrequently,  a  felicity  of  talent,  or  a  more  than  usual 
degree  of  understanding,  is  requisite  to  manage  an  exe- 
getical  inquiry  with  success.  But  the  interpretation  of 
1 


^  INTRODUCTION. 

the  sacred  books  is,  from  various  causes,  (a)  still  more 
difficult;  as  the  general  consent  of  the  learned,  and  the 
wonderful  paucity  (6)  of  good  interpreters  fully  evince. 
(Morus,  p.  4.  II.) 

a)  These  causes  are,  their  antiquity ;  the  peculiar  dia- 
led of  the  Scriptures,  which  greatly  differs  from  that  of  the 
western  laneuages ;  the  manners,  customs,  education,  style, 
modes  of  thinking  and  expression,  situation,  government,  cli- 
mate, &c,  of  the  authors,  in  many  respects  so  very  dissimilar  to 
ours  ;  the  fewness  of  the  hooks  written  in  the  Scriptural  dialect ; 
and  the  want  of  commentators  and  lexicographers  to  whom 
the  language  was  vernacular.  To  these  causes  may  he  addt  d, 
the  authority  and  influence  which  many  erroneous  commentaries 
of  distincuished  men  have  had,  over  the  Christian  world. 

6)  1  he  paucity  of  siood  interpreters,  who,  unbiassed  by  par- 
ty sentiments,  have  pursued  the  interpretation  of  the  Scrip- 
tures in  A  Pimple  philological  mi^nner,  and  been  consistent  through- 
out in  the  application  of  principles  i)urely  exfgetical,  is  much 
greater  than  anj  one  will  be  disposed  to  believe,  until  experi- 
ence, acquired  by  consulting  Commentaries,  shall  have  convinced 
him. 

§  3.  Definitions.  The  art  of  interpretation  is  the 
art  of  teaching  what  is  the  meaning  of  another's  lan- 
guage ;  or  that  faculty,  which  enables  us  to  attach  to 
another's  language,  the  same  meaning  as  the  author 
himself  attached  to  it.     (Morus,  p.  6.  111.) 

It  is  better  to  define  interpretation  as  an  act  than  as  an  art. 
To  interpret  a  passage  is  to  shew  or  declare  the  sense  of  it,  or 
•imply  to  explain  tHe  meaning,  1.  e.  the  meaning  which  the 
author  himself  of  the  passage  attached  to  it.  Any  other  mean- 
ing than  this,  can  never  be  called,  with  propriety,  the  meaning 
of  the  author. 

Interpretation,  strictly  speaking,  may  be  called  grammatical, 
when  the  meaning  of  words,  phrases,  and  sentences,  is  made  out 
from  the  usus  loquendi  and  context ;  historical,  when  the  mean- 
ing is  illustrated  and  confirmed  by  historical  arguments,  which 
serve  to  evince  that  no  other  sense  can  be  put  upon  the  passage, 
whether  you  regard  the  nature  of  the  subject,  or  the  genius  and 
manner  of  the  writer. 

§  4.  Requisites  of  a  good  interpreter.  The  act  of  in- 
terpretation implies  two  things  ;  viz.,  a  right  percep- 
tion of  the  meaning  of  words,  and  a  proper  explanation 


INTRODUCTION.  3 

of  that  meaning,  (a)  Hence  a  good  interpreter  must 
possess  a  sound  understandings  and  be  skilful  in  explana- 
tion,    (Morns,  p.  8.  IV.) 

a)  The  words  of  Ernesti  are,  Subiilitas  intelligendi  ft  explican- 
di ;  a  phrase  which  would  convey  a  meaning  quite  foreie;n  to  his 
intention,  if  literally  translated  into  F.n^lish,  or,  at  niost,  convey 
his  idea  very  imperfectly.  His  meaning  is,  that  the  interpre- 
ter, who  eX'  rcises  a  sound  under^anding,  or  possesses  subiilitas 
initUigendi^  must  demand  satisfactory  reasons  for  believing  in  any 
parliciilar  exegesis,  and  build  his  opinion,  in  respect  to  the 
meaning:  of  any  passage,  on  such  reasons.  These  reasons  are 
founded  on  the  usus  loquendi,  the  context,  the  nature  of  the  sub- 
ject, the  design  of  the  writer,  &c.  An  interpretation  supported 
by  none  of  these,  cannot  be  admitted  by  a  sound  understanding. 

The  subiilitas  explicandi,  which  I  have  referred  to  skill  in  tX' 
planalion^  consists  generally  in  the  accuracy  of  explanation.  To 
constitute  such  accuracy,  in  its  proper  sense,  a  right  use  must  be 
made  of  all  the  means  of  interpretation,  so  as  to  gain  precise 
and  definite  views  of  the  author's  meaning  ;  then,  every  thing 
should  be  so  defined  and  expressed,  as  to  exclude  all  ambiguity 
and  uncertainty;  and  lastly,  the  vvh<»le  should  be  exhibited  in 
the  proper  order,  which  the  nature  of  language  and  of  reasoning 
demands. 

§  5.  Suhtilitas  intelligendi.  A  sound  understanding  is 
exhibited  in  two  ways  ;  first^  in  discerning  whether  we 
really  understand  a  passage  or  not,  and,  in  case  we  do 
not,  in  discovering  the  difficulties  that  lie  in  the  way  of 
rightly  understanding  it,  and  the  grounds  of  those  diffi- 
culties ;  secondly^  in  finding  out,  by  a  proper  method  of 
investigation,  the  sense  of  those  passages  which  are 
difficult.     (Morus,  p.  10.  V.) 

§  6.  Means  by  which  difficulties  and  their  causes  are 
detected,  A  good  degree  of  talent  or  capacity  is  requi- 
site for  this  ;  for  men  of  small  capacity  frequently  as- 
sent to  things  which  seem  to  be  taught,  without  any 
good  reasons  for  so  doing  ;  and  often  believe  themselves 
to  understand,  what  they  do  not  understand.  To  a  good 
degree  of  talent,  must  be  joined  a  careful  habit  of  dis- 
tinguishing ideas  of  things  from  mere  words  or  sounds  ; 
(a)  for  we  ought  always  to  inquire,  in  respect  to  any 
word,  whether  we   have  a  distinct  perception  of  the 


4  INTRODUCTlOJr. 

thing  or  idea,  which  it  is  meant  to  designate,  and  not  t# 
regard  merely  the  sound  of  the  word.  (Morns,  p.  10. 
VI.) 

o)  Specially  should  this  be  done,  where  language  is  employed 
to  designate  any  thing,  that  is  not  the  object  of  our  senses,  but  is 
of  an  intellectual  or  metaphysical  nature.  Habit  as  well  as  care 
will  do  much  in  these  cases.  Translating  from  one  language  in- 
to another,  is  an  excellent  exercise  to  form  a  habit  of  nice  dis* 
tinctioQ  ;  for  when  we  come  to  express  the  ideas  of  an  author  in 
another  language,  we  often  find  that  we  had  only  an  indefinite 
perception  ol  them.  The  employment  of  teachiug,  also,  is  well 
adapted  to  promote  the  same  purpose;  as  is  the  study  of  logic^ 
or  any  science  which  leads  to  nice  discrimination. 

§  7.  Aleans  of  removing  these  difficulties.  The  first 
means  is,  a  just  and  accurate  knowledge  of  languages, 
(a)  The  next^  an  acquaintance  with  the  principles  of 
interpretation.  Not  that  no  one  can  interpret,  at  all, 
without  a  scientific  knowledge  of  these  principles  ;  but 
because  they  assist  men  of  moderate  talents,  and  guide 
them,  as  it  were,  in  the  right  way,  so  that  they  are  not 
left  to  depend  on  chance  rather  than  reason.  Besides, 
they  are,  in  this  way,  supplied  with  a  common  rule  for 
judging,  in  controverted  cases.  (6)  Finally^  as  in  detect- 
ing difficulties,  exercise  and  habit  are  important;  so 
here,  they  are  of  so  much  consequence,  that  all  other 
advantasres  will  be  of  little  use  without  them.  (Morus, 
p.  12—19.  VII.  Nos.  I.  II.  HI.) 

a)  An  accurate  knowledge  of  grammatical  principles  and  of  the 
tisus  loquendi  is  here  intended  ;  for  what  authority  can  an  inter- 
pretation have,  which  violates  rules  of  grammar  and  the  usages 
of  speech  ? 

b)  Precepts  for  interpretation,  well  grounded,  clearly  under- 
stood, and  judiciously  applied,  very  much  facilitate  the  task  of 
the  interpreter,  and  render  the  result  of  his  labours  more  worthy 
of  confidence.  He  who  acts  by  well  established  rules  is  more 
certain  that  he  acts  right,  than  if  he  fo!iov/ed  his  own  opinion 
merely,  in  nil  cases  of  difficulty  and  doubt.  And  in  controversies 
of  an  exegetical  or  doctrinal  nature,  to  what  can  the  appeal  be 
made,  in  the  ultimate  resort,  but  to  the  principles  of  interpreta- 
tion, i.  e.  the  precepts  or  rules  which  it  prescribes  ?  Nor  are 
these  principles  useful  only  to  men  of  moderate  talents,  (as  Er- 
nest! would  seem  to  iDtimate,)  but  to  men  of  the  highest  talents 


INTRODUCTION. 


and  best  acquisitions.  Men  may,  indeed,  learn  them  by  usage 
in  the  interpretation  of  authors,  without  the  scientific  study  of 
them  ;  but  the  latter  is  the  easier  method,  and  guards  most  effec- 
tually against  mistakes. 

In  addition  to  these  helps  for  removing  difficulties,  a  knowledge 
of  history,  geography,  chronoiogy,  antiquities,  iic,  is  of  high  im- 
portance. 

§  8.  Exercises  and  habits  adapted  to  overcome  the  dijffi' 
culties  of  interpretation.  First,  we  should  attend  the  in- 
structions of  a  g"ood  interpreter;  next,  we  should  read 
those  works  where  exegetical  knowledge  is  displayed  in 
the  best  manner,  and  reflect  much  upon  them,  for  in 
this  way  we  may  be  led  to  the  imitation  of  them ;  and 
lastly,  those  books,  which  we  desire  to  interpret,  must 
be  assiduously  and  constantly  perused.      (Morus,  p.  19, 

In  the  two  first  exercises,  example  serves  both  to  excite  and  to 
guide  our  efforts.  The  habit  of  readif  g,  oftt  n  and  assiduously, 
the  book  which  we  desire  to  interpret,  is  of  more  importance 
than  any,  or  perhaps  than  all,  other  means  within  our  power.  Ev- 
ery new  perusal  will  suggest  to  an  intelligent  and  inquisitive  mind 
many  ideas,  frequently  very  important  ones,  which  he  had  not 
before  entertained.  This  practice  cannot,  therefore,  be  too 
strongly  recommended  to  the  student. 

§  9.  Subtilitas  explicandi^  i.  e.  skill  in  explanation.  This 
is  exhibited,  by  expressing  the  sense  of  an  author,  ei- 
ther in  words  of  the  same  language  which  are  more 
perspicuous  than  his,  or  by  translating  into  another  lan- 
guage, and  explaining  by  argument  and  illustration,  (a) 
In  addition  to  an  accurate  knowledge  of  the  language 
which  we  translate,  skill  in  explaining  requires  that  we 
should  exhibit  purity  of  diction  ;  still  preserving,  so  far 
as  may  be,  the  features  of  the  original,  lest  the  mode 
of  reasoning  should  be  obscured,  which  sometimes  de- 
pends on  the /or w  of  the  words.     (Morus,  p.  20.  VIII.) 

d)  VVe  explain  by  arsnment^  when  we  exhibit  reasons  dfawn 
from  the  grammar  and  idiom  of  the  lans:uage,  the  contest,  and 
the  design  of  the  writer.  We  illustrate^  when  we  cast  Jig'ht  upon 
the  meaning  of  an  aurhor,  which  is  borrowed  from  history,  chro- 
nology, antiquities,  kc.  Purity  and  brevity  of  style  should  char- 
acterize both  these  modes  of  explanation. 
1* 


J6f  introdi.ctio:n'. 

§10.  Definition  of  Hermeneutics. {a)  Hermeneiitics  is 
the  science  which  teaches  to  find,  in  an  accurate  and  ju- 
dicious manner,  the  meaning  of  an  author,  and  appro- 
priately to  explain  it  to  others.     (Morus,  p.  21.  IX.) 

(a)  Modern  usage  distinguishes  between  Hermeneutics  and 
Exegesis.  Hermeneutics  is  the  theory  or  scievce  of  interpre- 
tation ;  it  comprises  and  exhibits  the  principles  and  rules  of 
this  art.  Exegesis  is  the  practical  application  of  these  rules ; 
the  act  of  carrying  them  into  execution.  The  etymology  of  the 
two  words  would  lead  to  the  conclusion,  that  both  are  of  the 
same  meaning ;  but  usage  has  assigned  a  different  signification 
to  them. 

§  11.  Division  of  Hermeneutics.  Hermeneutics,  con- 
sidered as  the  art  of  finding  the  sense  of  words,  (so  far 
as  it  is  an  art,  and  is  the  proper  subject  of  precepts,) 
consists  of  two  parts,  viz.  the  theoretical  and  preceptive. 
(a)  The  first  comprises  general  principles^  in  respect 
to  the  meaning  of  words  and  the  various  kinds  of  them. 
On  these  principles,  the  rules  of  interpretation  and  the 
reasons  of  them  are  grounded.  The  second  consists  of 
rules,  which  are  to  guide  us,  in  investigating  the  sense 
of  an  author's  words.  Both  of  these  parts  are  essential; 
for  on  the  one  hand,  principles^  without  any  rules  de- 
duced from  them,  would  be  inadequate  to  guide  our 
philological  inquiries ;  and  on  the  other,  rules  can  nei- 
ther be  perspicuous,  nor  well  grounded,  which  are  not 
established  upon  principles.     (Morus,  p.  22.  X.) 

(a)  Exegesis  differs  from  the  preceptive  part  of  Hermeneutics, 
inasmuch  as  it  is  the  act  of  carrying  the  precepts  into  execution, 
and  not  the  precepts  themselves. 

§  12.  Division  of  the  work.  It  may  be  divided  into 
three  parts ;  the  first  contains  the  principles  and  pre- 
cepts of  Hermeneutics  ;  the  second  has  respect  to  the 
making  of  translations  and  commentaries  ;  and  the  third 
treats  of  the  various  kinds  of  hermeneutical  Apparatus, 
and  of  its  proper  use,  in  the  interpretation  of  the  New 
Testament. 

Of  these  three  parts,  the  fi'-st  is  translated  fhrouffhout,  and  so 
much  of  the  second  as  seemfd  to  be  particularly  useful.  The 
third  part  is  essentially  comprised  in  the  first,  so  far  as  it  prop- 


OF  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS.  V 

criy  belops^s  to  the  province  of  Flermeneutics  ;  and  therefore  may 
well  be  dispensed  with,  in  an  elementary  treatise  like  this.  So 
far  as  the  third  part  contains  any  thing  not  substantially  com- 
prised in  the  first,  it  properly  belongs  to  the  province  of  sacred 
literature,  and  specially  to  literary  history,  or  Introductions,  (as 
they  are  called)  which  are  designed  to  give  the  student  a  sjptdal 
view  of  the  various  authors,  books,  versions,  &;c,  of  the  Scrip- 
tures. 


PART  I. 

CHAPTER  I. 
fCompare  with  this  chapter,  Keil,  H  5 — 8.     Seller,  k)  41 — 46.] 

OF  THE  MEANING  OF  W^ORDS. 

§  13.  Design  of  this  chapter.  The  design  of  the  fol- 
lowing' remarks  upon  the  meaning  of  words,  is  to  ex- 
hibit the  ground  or  principles,  whence  all  certainty  in 
the  interpretation  of  language  arises.  If  from  the  na- 
ture and  use  of  language,  certain  principles  may  be 
clearly  deduced,  which  will  serve  as  a  guide  to  explain 
it,  then,  it  is  evident,  the  essential  part  of  the  theory  of 
Hermeneutics  consists  of  these  principles.  (Morus,  p. 
27.  I.) 

§  14.  Every  word  must  have  some  meaning.  To 
every  word  there  ought  to  be  assigned,  and  in  the 
Scriptures,  there  is  unquestionably  assigned,  some  idea 
or  notion  of  a  thing ;  which  we  call  the  meaning  or 
sense  of  the  word,  (a)  (Morus,  p.  28.  II.) 

a)  Otherwise  words  are  useless,  and  have  no  more  significa- 
tion than  the  inarticulate  sounds  of  animals. 

§  1 5.  Definitions.  The  literal  sense  of  words,  is  the 
sense  which  is  so  connected  with  them,  that  it  is  first 


8  ON  THE  MEANING  OF    WORDS. 

in  order,  and  is  spontaneously  presented  to  the  mind, 
as  soon  as  the  sound  of  the  word  is  heard,  (a)  The  lit- 
eral sense  does  not  differ,  among-  the  older  and  valuable 
writers,  from  the  sense  of  the  letter  ;  although  some  ig- 
norant persons,  in  later  times,  have  very  erroneously 
made  a  distinction.  Era^^mus  and  his  cotemporaries  use 
both  phrases  promiscuously.  Literal  means  the  same 
as  the  Greek  lo  yfy^a(.i}ievov^  or  the  Latin  5cn/>/w//i  / 
whence  the  phrases  scriptum  sequi^  and  scriptum  inter- 
pretari. 

a)  The  literal  sense  is  the  same  as  the  primitive  or  original 
sense  ;  or,  at  least,  it  is  equivalent  to  that  sense  which  has  usurp- 
ed the  place  of  the  original  one,  e-  ^.  the  original  sense  of  the 
word  tragedy  has  lona^  ceased  to  be  c  urrent,  and  the  literal  sense 
of  this  word,  now,  is  that  which  has  taken  the  place  of  the  orig- 
inal one. 

§  1 6.  The  meaning  of  words  conventional.  Words  con- 
sidered simply  as  sounds,  have  no  meaning;  for  they 
are  not  natural  and  necessary  signs  of  things,  but  con- 
ventional ones,  (a)  Usage  or  custom  has  constituted  a 
connexion  between  words  and  ideas.  (Morus,  p.  28.  III.) 

a)  InteTJections  or  exclamations  may,  perhaps,  be  considered 
as  a  kind  of  exception  to  this  reiiiark.  Words  also  which  the 
Greeks  call  Ovo^aTOnenocri^ieva^  i  e.  words  the  sounds  of 
which  imitate  the  sense,  are  also  considered  by  many  as  an  ex- 
ception. But  there  is  so  much  of  fancy  in  the  construction  of 
these  words,  and  *'.jey  are  so  ditferently  formed  in  different  lan- 
guaj^es,  that  no  solid  proof  of  their  being  an  exception  can  fairly 
be  made  out.  Great  efforts  have  been  made,  in  former  times, 
to  shew  that  every  syllable  and  even  letter  of  a  word,  in  the  He- 
brew laneuaire,  had  a  special  sis:nifi<ancy  attached  to  it.  F.  M, 
Helmont  published  a  work  entitled  Jiiphabetum  JS^aturale^  the  ob- 
ject of  which  was  to  sh^'W, that  everydifferent  opening  of  the  mouth 
in  order  to  pronounce  different  lette  rs,was  significant  of  some  idea. 
To  illustrate  this,  he  caused  a  great  number  of  plates  to  be  en- 
graved, which  he  insert^^d  in  the  work ;  so  thrit  his  book,  as  Vlo- 
rus  pa)s,  is  mira  capitiim  humanorum  collection  quae  admodum 
distorta  ora  ostendat.  Caspar  iVeumann,  in  his  Exodus  Lin  juae 
Sonctae^  followed  much  the  same  path,  but  with  more  modera- 
tion ;  and  V.  E.  Loescher,  in  his  De  caussis  Lin<r,  Heh.  exhibits 
the  same  principles.  E.  g.  in  the  word  Vl.fi<  N  says  hr,  indi- 
cates motion;  'n<j  eruption;  !lfe,  violence.  The  whole  word  Y'^M 
then,  signifies  something  in  which  motion  bursts  forth  with  vio- 


ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS.  9 

hnce.  The  stuileut  may  smile  at  this  egregious  trifling  ;  but  the 
time  has  been,  when  the  word  of  God  was  explained  by  leading 
men  in  the  churches,  in  connexion  with  such  wretched  puerili- 
ties.    (Morus,  p.  3].  IV.) 

§  17.  The  connexion  beiweoi  rvords  and  ideas  now  ren- 
dered necessary^  by  usage.  Such  is  the  fact,  whatever 
may  have  been  the  case,  at  first.  This  does  not  mean, 
however,  that  a  word  is  susceptible  of  only  one  mean- 
ing-; for  usage  contradicts  this.  But  from  this  princi- 
ple, we  learn  (1)  That  neither  in  using  or  interpreting 
a  word,  are  we  at  liberty  to,  afiix  to  it  an  arbitrary 
sense,  (a)  (2)  That  the  sense  of  a  word  cannot  be  di- 
verse or  multifarious,  at  the  same  time,  and  in  the  same 
passage  or  expression.  (6)     (Morus,  p.  33.  V.  VI.  VII.) 

a)  The  fact,  that  usage  has  attached  any  particular  meaning 
to  a  word,  lilte  any  other  historical  fact,  is  to  be  proved  by  ade- 
quate testimony.  This  testimony  may  be  drawn  from  books  in 
v/hich  the  word  is  employed,  or  from  daily  use  io  conversation. 
But  the  fact  of  a  particular  meaning  being  attached  to  a  word, 
when  once  established,  can  no  more  be  changed  or  denied,  than 
any  liistoricai  event  whatever.  Of  course,  an  arbitrary  sense 
can  never,  with  propriety,  be  substituted  for  a  real  one. 

b)  All  men,  in  their  daily  conversation  and  writings,  attach  but 
one  sense  to  a  word,  at  the  same  time  and  in  the  same  passage  ; 
unless  they  design  to  «peak  in  enigmas.  Of  course,  it  would  be 
in  opposition  to  the  universal  custom  of  language,  if  more  than 
one  meaning  should  be  attached  to  any  word  of  Scripture,  in 
such  a  case.     Yet  many  have  done  so.    See  H  21.  22. 

§  18.  Signification  of  words  multiplied  in  process  of 
time.  Although  a  word  can  have  but  one  meaning,  at 
the  same  time  and  in  the  same  place,  usage  has  gradu- 
ally assigned  many  meanings  to  the  same  word,  (a)  lest 
words  should  be  indefinitely  multiplied,  and  the  diffi- 
culty of  learning  a  language  become  too  great.  (Mo- 
rus, p.  39.  VIII.) 

a)  The  question  then  for  an  interpreter  is  simply  this  ;  which 
one  of  the  significations  thnt  a  woid  has,  is  connected  with  its 
use  in  any  particular  instance  ^ 

§  19.  How  can  the  meaning  iti  each  case  be  found  ?  (l) 
From  the  general  manner  of  speaking,  i.  e.  commoa 


10  ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS. 

usage.  (2)  From  the  proximate  words  or  context.  (Mo- 
rus,  p.  41.  I.  II.) 

That  is,  the  usual  and  obvious  raeaniuG:  is  attached  to  the 
word;  or  t- Ise  one  which  the  context  render?  riecesDiry.  In  ad- 
dition to  the  aid  drawn  from  these  s  -urces,  an  interpreter  r«iay 
sometintes  obtain  assistance  ^rom  th(^  scope  or  design  of  the  wri- 
ter, or  ffom  history,  antiquities,  the  nature  of  the  sulject,  k.c. 
(Morus,  p.  42.  III.  IV.) 

§  20,  Ambiguify  of  words  arises  from  various  causes. 
(1)  From  the  faiiit  oi'  writers,  (a)  (?)  From  neglect  m 
the  construction  and  necessary  coiHiexions  oi"  words 
and  sentences  ;  proper  care  not  having  been  taken  to 
guard  the  reader  against  uncertainty^,  and  to  afford  him 
the  best  means  for  tinding  the  true  sense. (6)  (3)  From 
the  manner  in  which  common  usage  often  forms  lan- 
guage ;  which,  not  being  guided  by  philosophy  or  re- 
fined knowledge,  is  frequently  deficient  in  respect  to 
accuracy. (^c)  (Morus,  p.  44.  X.  I — V.) 

a)  When  they  are  ignorant  of  the  rules  for  writing  with  accu- 
racy and  perspicuity.  6)  E.  g.  the  answer  of  the  Delphic  oracle, 
Aio  tc  Romanos  vinctre  posse.,  which  may  be  rendered,  with  equal 
prf»bability,  that  the  Romans  would  conquer  lyrrfius,  or  P>r- 
rhus  the  Komans.  c)  No  other  proof  of  this  is  needed,  than  what 
the  perusal  of  a  conuposition  by  an  illiterate  person  will  afford. 

Besides  the  causes  of  ambiguity  above  enumerated,  we  may- 
reckon,  ignorance  of  the  usus  loquendi.  If  the  interpreter  is  not 
acquainted  with  this,  (and  in  respect  to  words  which  are  ana^ 
XeyOfA€va^  he  must  of  course  be  ignorant  of  it,  in  many  cases, )he 
is  1»  ft  in  doubt,  unless  the  context  decides  for  him.  As  this  is 
not  always  the  case,  there  is  room  here  for  ambiguity. 

§  21.  Conclusions  from  what  has  been  said.  From  what 
has.  already  been  said,  in  this  chapter,  about  the  use  of 
words,  we  may  discover  the  ground  of  all  the  certainty 
which  attends  the  interpretation  of  language. (a)  For 
IJiere  can  be  no  certainty  at  all,  in  respect  to  the  inter- 
pretation of  any  passage,  unless  a  kind  of  necessity  com- 
pel us  to  affix  a  particular  sense  to  a  word ;  which 
sense,  as  I  have  said  before,  must  be  one ;  and,  unless 
there  are  special  reasons  for  a  tropical  meaning,  it  must 
be  the  literal  sense. (&)    (Morus,  p.  47.  XI .) 


ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS.  11 

a)  If  any  one  should  deny  that, the  above  principles  lead  to 
certainty,  when  strictly  observed,  be  vrouJd  deny  the  possibility 
of  finding;  the  meaning  of  language  with  certainty,  b)  The  sec- 
ondary or  figurative  sense  of  words  is  as  often  necessary,  as  the 
literal  sense.  Many  words  have  even  ceased  to  convey  a  literal 
meaning.  The  obvious  sense  of  a  word,  therefore,  in  any  par- 
ticular connexion,  is  the  necessary  one  ;  and  a  conviction  that 
the  sense  in  any  case  is  necessary,  will  be  in  exact  proportion  to 
the  degree  in  which  it  is  felt  to  be  obvious.  Hy  obvious  here,  is 
not  meant  what  is  obvious  to  an  illiterate  or  hasty  interpreter; 
but  to  one  who  has  learning,  and  good  judgment,  and  makes  use 
of  all  the  proper  means  of  interpretation. 

§  22.  Error  of  those^  who  assign  many  meanings  to  a 
word^  at  the  same  time  and  in  the  same  place.  Such  an 
opinion  is  to  be  rejected  ;  although  the  practice  is  very 
old,  as  Augustine  testifies,  Confess.  Xll.  30,  31.  The 
opinion  probably  originated  from  the  variety  of  inter- 
pretations given  to  ambiguous  passages ;  several  of 
which  appeared  probable,  and  were  recommended  by 
a  sentiment  of  reverence  towards  the  authors  of  them. 
A  principle  of  this  nature,  however,  must  introduce 
very  great  uncertainty  into  exegesis  ;  than  which  noth- 
ing can  be  more  pernicious.    (Morus,  p.  35.  VII.) 

§  23.  Error  of  those^  who  affirm  that  the  words  of  Scrip- 
ture mean  all  that  they  possibly  can  -mean.  This  <iprung 
from  the  Rabbinical  schools,  and  passed  from  them,  in 
early  times,  to  Christians.  The  transition  is  very 
easy  from  this  error,  to  every  kind  of  licence  in  the  in- 
troduction of  allegory,  prophecy,  and  mystery  into  eve- 
ry part  of  the  Bible  ;  as  the  experience  of  the  Jews,  of 
the  ancient  Fathers,  the  scholastic  divines,  and  the  fol- 
lowers of  Cocceius  demonstrates. 

The  Rabbinic  maxim  is  ;  On  every  point  of  the  Scripture,  hang 
suspended  mountains  of  sen«e.  The  Talmud  says,  God  so  gave 
the  Law  to  Mos<  s,  that  a  thing  can  be  shewn  to  ne  clean  and 
unclean  in  49  different  ways.  Most  of  the  Fathers,  and  a  mul- 
titude of  Commentators  in  later  times,  were  infected  with  these 
principles.  Little  more  than  a  century  ago,  the  celebrated  Coc- 
ceius, of  Leyden,  maintained  the  sentiment,  that  all  th^  possible 
meanings  of  a  word  in  the  Scripture  are  to  be  united.  By  his 
learning  and  influence,  a  powerful  party  were  raised   up,  in  the 


12  ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS. 

Protestant  church,  in  favour  of  such  a  principle.     The  mischiefs 
resulting  from  it  have  not  yet  ceased  to  operate. 

§  24.  The  sense  of  words  -properly  considered^  is  not  al- 
legoricaL  Alleg-ory  is  rather  an  accommodation  of  the 
sense  of  words ^  or  an  accommodation  of  things,  to  the  il- 
lustration of  some  doctrine.  Moderately  used,  and  well 
adapted,  it  may  be  of  some  profit  which  is  entitled  to 
regard.  But  when  resorted  to  by  the  unlearned  and 
those  of  an  uncultivated  taste,  it  commonly  degenerates 
into  empty  and  ridiculous  trifling,  (Comp.  Morus,  Dis- 
sertt.  Tom.  I.  p.  370,  &c.) 

It  is  impossihle  adequately  to  describe  the  excesses  and  ab- 
surdities, which  have  been  committed,  in  consequence  of  the  al- 
eporizing  spirit.  From  the  time  of  Ori8:en,  vtrho  converted  into 
allegory  the  account  of  the  creation  of  the  world,  the  creation 
and  fall  of  man,  and  multitudes  of  other  simple  facts  related  in 
the  Bible,  down  to  the  Jesuit,  who  makes  the  account  of  the 
creation  of  the  greater  light  to  rule  the  day  to  mean  the  Pope, 
and  the  creation  of  the  lesser  light  and  the  stars  to  mean  the 
subjection  of  kings  and  princes  to  the  Pope,  there  have  been 
multitudes  in  and  out  of  the  catholic  church,  who  have  pursued 
the  same  path.  The  most  sacred  doctrines  of  religion  have  of- 
ten been  defended  and  assailed  by  arguments  of  equal  validity 
and  of  the  same  nature,  as  the  exposition  of  the  Jesuit  just  men- 
tioned. The  spirit  which  prompts  to  this  may,  in  some  cases, 
be  commendable  ;  but  as  it  is  a  mere  business  of  fancy  connect- 
ed with  no  principles  of  philology,  and  supported  by  no  reasons 
drawn  from  the  nature  of  language,  so  it  is,  for  the  most  part,  not 
only  worthless,  but  dangerous.  And  of  what  possible  use,  in  the 
end,  can  a  |)rinciple  be,  which  can  prove  the  most  important 
doctrine,  either  of  Judaism  or  Christianity,  as  well  from  the  first 
verse  of  the  first  chapter  of  Chronicles,  as  from  any  part  of  the 
Bible  ?  Or  rather,  of  what  use  can  the  Bible  be,  if  it  may  be  in- 
terpreted by  such  principles  ? 

§  25.  Properly  speakings  there  is  no  typical  sense  of 
words.  Types  are  not  words  hut  things^  which  God  has 
designated  as  signs  of  future  events.  Nor  is  any  spe- 
cial pains  necessary  for  the  interpretation  of  them. 
The  explanation  of  them,  which  the  Holy  Spirit  him- 
self has  given,  renders  them  intelligible.  Beyond  his 
instructions  on  this  subject,  we  should  be  very  careful 
never  to  proceed.     As  for  those,  who  maintain  a  typi- 


ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS.  13 

cal  design  in  all  parts  of  the  Scripture,  they  certainly 
display  very  little  judgment  or  consideration  ;  for  they 
lay  open  the  way  for  the  mere  arbitrary  introduction 
of  types  into  every  part  of  the  Bible.  The  design  of 
the  Holy  Spirit,  in  the  mention  of  this  or  that  thing 
in  the  Scriptures,  can  be  understood  only  so  far  as  he 
himself  has  explained  it,  or  afforded  obvious  grounds  of 
explanation. 

If  it  be  asked,  How  far  are  we  to  consider  the  Old  Testament 
as  typical?  I  should  answer,  without  any  hesitation  ;  Just  so 
much  of  it  is  to  be  regarded  as  ty{)ical,  as  the  New  Testament 
affirms  to  be  so  ;  and  \o  more.  The  fact,  that  any  thing  or 
event  under  the  Old  Testament  dispensation  was  designed  to  pre- 
fjg:ure  something  upder  the  New,  can  be  known  to  us  only  by 
revelation  ;  and,  of  course,  all  that  is  not  designated  by  divine 
authority  as  typical,  can  never  be  made  so,  by  any  authority 
less  than  that  which  guided  the  writers  of  the  Scriptures. 

§  26.  Danger  resulting  from  the  spirit  of  multiplying 
allegories  and  types.  That  sentiment,  which  through 
imprudence  or  want  of  knowledge  fell  from  some  of 
the  ancient  Fathers,  and  was  echoed  by  many  of  the 
Romish  doctors,  viz.  that  some  passages  of  Scripture  have 
no  literal  sense^  (a)  is  dangerous  beyond  description.  I 
presume  they  meant  to  affirm  this  of  those  passages 
which  they  did  not  understand.  Such  a  sentiment  has 
been  recently  defended  by  Wittius  on  the  Proverbs  of 
Solomon  ;  and  Thomas  Woolston,  taking  advantage  of 
this,  has  converted  the  narrations  of  our  Saviour's  mir- 
acles into  mere  allegories. (6) 

a)  By  literal  sense  here,  Ernesti  means  a  sense  not  allegorical 
or  mystical ;  for  to  these  literal  is  here  opposed,  and  not  to  trop- 
ical., as  it  commonly  is.  There  are  a  multitude  of  passages  in 
Scripture,  which  have  only  a  tropical  meaning,  and  which,  nev- 
ertheless, are  neither  allegorical  nor  mystical, 

h)  This  shews  how  dangerous  it  is,  to  set  the  adversaries  of 
religion  an  example  of  perverting  the  interpretation  of  the  Scrip- 
tures. 

§  27.  *The  sense  of  words  depends  on  the  vsus  loquendi. 
This  must  be  the  case,  because  the  sense  of  words  is 
conventional  and  regulated  wholly  by  usage.  Usage 
then  being  understood,  the  sense  of  words  is  of  course 
understood. 

2 


H  #N  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS. 

§  28.  Usus  loquendi  determined  in  a  variety  of  ways.  To 
determine  it,  respect  must  be  had  to  time,  (a)  religion, 
(6)  sect,  education,  common  life,  (c)  and  civil  affairs  ;  (e) 
all  of  which  have  influence  on  an  author's  language, 
and  characterize  it.  For  the  same  word  is  employed 
in  one  sense  respecting  the  things  of  common  life ;  in 
another,  respecting  the  things  of  religion  ;  in  another 
still,  in  the  schools  of  Philosophy,  and  even  these  are 
not  always  agreed  in  the  use  of  words.  (Morus,  p.  48. 
XII— Xlil.) 

a)  The  ancient  and  modern  sense  of  many  words  differs.  6) 
rictim^  sacrifice^  law^  &c,  in  the  Old  Testament,  are  ofien  em- 
ployed in  a  sense,  which  differs  from  that  of  the  same  words  ia 
the  New  Testament,  c)  Thus  to  perceive  in  common  life  is  to 
feel  or  experience  ;  in  philosophy,  l9  form  an  id'^a  in  the  mind  ; 
amon^  the  Academic  sect,  it  means  to  know  a  thing  vrith  certain- 
iy,  in  opposition  to  mere  conjecture.  So  XdOa^lfff^og^  O^Cf^J, 
&;c,  differ  in  meaninj^,  when  employed  by  a  heatlien,  a  Jew,  or  a 
Christian,  c)  The  technical  and  peculiar  sense  of  law-language, 
is  too  well  known  to  need  illustration. 

To  these  causes,  which  operate  upon  the  usus  loquendi^  may 
be  added,  the  style  of  a  writer.  We  must  inquire  whether  he 
"wntes  poetry  or  prose  ;  and  whether  the  writer  himself  is  fervid 
or  cool,  turgid  or  dry,  accurate  and  polished  or  the  reverse. 
Every  writer  has  his  own  particular  usus  loquendi;  and  most 
writers,  provincialisms;  and  every  one  is  influenced  bj  his  own 
peculiar  circumstances.  What  writers  can  be  more  unlike,  in 
respect  to  style,  than  Isaiah  and  Jeremiah,  Paul  and  John?  An 
interpreter  must  make  himself  thoroughly  acquainted  with  all 
these  various  circumstances. 

§  29.  Grammatical  and  historical  sense.  The  ob- 
servance of  all  these  matters  belongs,  in  a  special  man- 
ner, to  grammarians,  whose  business  it  is  to  investigate 
the  sense  of  words.  Hence  the  literal  sense  is  also  call- 
ed the  grammatical ;  literalis  and  grammaticus  havmg 
the  same  meaning.  It  is  also  called  the  historic  sense ; 
because,  like  other  matters  of  fact,  it  is  supported  by 
historic  testimony.  (Morus,  p.  66.  XVII.  Comp.  §  3, 
note,  supra.) 

The  grammatical  sense  is  made  out  by  aid  of  the  principles  of 
grammar,  liberally  and  philosophically,  not  technically  consider- 
ed.    The  historical  sense,  is  that  wldch  is  built^oo  the  grammati- 


ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS.  1  5 

ual  one,  but  modified  by  historical  circumstances.  Interpreter* 
now  speak  ofthe  true  sense  of  a  passage,  by  calling  it  the  gram^ 
matico-historical  sense  ;  and  exegesis  founded  on  the  nature  of 
language,  is  called  grammatico- historical.  The  object,  in  using 
thi<?  compound  name,  is  to  shew  that  both  grammatical  and  his- 
torical considerations  are  employed,  in  making  out  the  sense  of 
a  word  or  passage. 

§  30.  The  grammatical  sense  the  only  true  one.  Those 
who  make  one  sense  grammatical^  and  another  logical^ 
do  not  comprehend  the  full  meaning"  of  grammatical 
sense.  We  are  not  to  look,  therefore,  for  a  sense  of 
words,  which  varies,  (in  its  nature,  or  simply  consider- 
ed as  the  sense,)  with  every  department  of  learning, 
or  with  every  diverse  object.  For  if  this  were  the 
case,  words  would  have  as  many  kinds  of  senses,  as  ob- 
jects are  multifarious.     (Morus,  p.  67.  XVllI.) 

In  regard  to  the  term  grammatical^  see  the  Note  above.  The 
meaning  of  Ernesti,  in  this  Section,  is,  that  the  laws  of  language 
are  the  same,  in  whatever  department  of  writing  or  speaking  it 
is  employed  ;  i.  e.  the  meaning  of  it  is  to  be  investigated  by  the 
usus  loquendi^  &c,  and  not  that  logic,  or  philosophy  can  deter- 
mine what  the  sense  of  words  must  be,  in  such  a  way,  that  the 
sense  may  be  called  logical^  philosophical^  &c. 

But  when  he  says,  as  in  5  29,  that  the  literal  and  grammatical 
sense  are  the  same  ;  and  in  ^  30,  that  the  grammatical  sense  is 
the  only  true  one  ;  he  does  not  mean  by  literal^  that  which  is 
opposed  to  tropical,  (for  the  tropical  meaning,  in  thousands  of 
cases,  is  the  grammatical  one,)  but  he  means  by  it,  the  same  as 
the  grammaiico-hislorical  sense  above  described. 

§  31.  The  principles  of  interpretation  are  common  to 
sacred  and  profane  writings.  Of  course,  the  Scriptures 
are  to  be  investigated  by  the  same  rules  as  other  books. 
Those  fanatics,  therefore,  are  not  to  he  regarded,  who, 
despising  literature  and  the  study  of  the  languages,  re- 
fer every  thing  merely  to  the  influence  of  the  Spirits 
Not  that  we  doubt  the  influence  of  the  Spirit;  or  that 
men  truly  pious  and  desirous  of  knowing  the  truth,  are 
assisted  h}^  it  in  their  researches,  specially  in  those 
things  that  pertain  to  faith  and  practice.  (Morus,  p.  69. 
XIX.) 

If  the  Scriptures  be  a  revelation  to  men,  then  are  they  to  be 


16  ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS. 

read  and  understood  by  men.  If  the  sanae  laws  of  language  are 
not  observed  in  this  revelation^  as  are  coiamon  to  men,  then  they 
have  no  guide  to  the  right  understandins;  of  the  Scriptures  ;  and 
an  interpreter  needs  inspiration  as  much  as  the  original  writer. 
It  follows,  of  course,  that  the  Scriptures  would  be  no  revelation 
in  themselves,  nor  of  any  use,  except  to  those  who  are  inspired. 
But  such  a  book,  the  Scriptures  are  not  ;  and  nothing  is  more 
evident,  than  that  ^' id  hen  God  has  spoken  to  men^  he  has  spok- 
en in  the  language  of  men^  for  he  has  spoken  by  men^  and  for 


§  32.  Language  can  he  properly  interpreted  only  in  a 
philological  way.  Not  much  unlike  these  fanatics,  and 
not  less  hurtful,  are  those,  who  from  a  similar  contempt 
of  i\\Q  languages  and  from  that  ignorance  of  them  which 
breeds  contempt,  depend,  in  their  interpretations,  rath- 
er on  things  than  on  words. (a)  In  this  way,  interpreta- 
tion beconies  uncei'tain  ;  and  truth  is  made  to  depend 
merely  on  the  judgment  of  men,  as  soon  as  we  depart 
from  the  words,  and  endeavour  to  decic'e  upon  the 
sense,  by  the  use  of  means  not  connected  with  them. 
Nor  will  this  mode  of  exegesis  at  all  avail  to  convince 
gainsayers  ;  who  themselves  boast  of  interpreting,  in 
like  manner,  by  things^  i.  e.  either  by  their  own  princi- 
ples and  opinions  before  formed,  or  by  the  sentiments 
of  philosophers.  Hence  arises  the  abuae  of  reason,  in 
the  interpretation  of  the  Scriptures. 

a)  The  meaning  is,  that  they  decide  from  that  knowledge  of 
things,  which  they  suppose  themselves  already  (o  possess,  rather 
than  from  the  words  of  the  author  ;  they  decide  by  what  they 
suppose  he  ought  to  mean,  rather  than  by  what  he  says. 

§  33.  *)hiy  method  of  interpretation  not  philological^  is 
fallacious.  Moreover,  the  method  of  gathering  the  sense 
of  words  from  things  is  altogether  deceptive  and  falla- 
cious; since  things  are  rather  to  be  known,  from  point- 
ing out  the  sense  of  words  in  a  proper  way.  it  is  by  the 
words  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  only,  that  we  are  led  to  un- 
derstand what  we  ought  to  think  respecting  things. 
Said  Melancthon  very  truly  ;  The  Scripture  cannot  be 
understood  theologically^  until  it  is  understood  grammal- 


ON  THE  MEANING  O^  WORDS.  1  7 

ically.  Luther  also  avers,  that  a  certain  knowledge  of 
the  sense  of  Scripture,  depends  solely  on  a  knowledge 
of  the  words. 

This  section  repeats,  in  another  form,  the  idea  of  ihe  preced- 
ing one.  In  both,  Ernesti  means  to  deny  the  possibility  of  truly 
interpreting  any  book,  by  other  means  than  those  which  are  phi- 
lological.  By  things,  he  means  the  application  of  our  previous 
views  of  things  to  the  words  of  an  author,  in  order  to  elicit  his 
meaning  ;  instead  of  proceeding  to  our  inquiries,  in  the  way  of 
grammatico-hiatorical  exegesis^  Not  that  our  previous  knowl- 
edge of  things  can  never  aid  us  ;  for  it  often  does  so  ;  bat  that 
this  can  serve  for  nothing  more  than  an  assistant  to  our  philolog- 
ical efforts,  as  the  following  section  shews. 

§  34.  The  analogy  of  faith  or  doctrine  not  to  guide  our 
interpretation.  Things^  therefore,  and  the  analogy  of 
faith^  or  doctrine^  (as  they  call  it,)  assist  an  interpreter 
only  so  far,  that  when  words  are  ambiguous,  either  from 
variety  of  signification,  from  structure,  or  any  other 
cause,  they  may  lead  us  to  define  the  signification  of 
them,  or  to  select  some  one  particular  meaning.  But 
here  we  must  take  good  care,  that  the  considerations 
which  we  use  for  explaining,  should  he  deduced  from 
the  plain,  perspicuous,  well  understood  language  of  oth- 
er passages,  and  that  the  words  which  we  are  endeav- 
ouring to  explain  do  not  contradict  them.  For  when 
we  investigate  the  sense  in  any  other  way  than  by  a 
grammatical  method,  we  effect  nothing  more,  than  to 
make  out  a  meaning,  which  in  itself  perhaps  is  not  ab- 
surd, but  which  lies  not  in  the  words,  and  therefore  is 
not  the  meaning  of  the  writer.  (Morus,  p.  253.  XVI — 
XIX.^ 

Very  much  has  been  said  both  for  and  as:ainst  the  analogy  of 
faith,  as  a  rule  of  interpretation.  I  may  safely  add,  that  on  this 
subject,  as  well  as  on  many  others,  very  much  has  been  said 
amiss,  for  want  of  proper  definitions.  What  is  the  analogy  of 
faith  ?  It  is  either  simply  Scriptural  or  sectarian.  By  Scriptu- 
ral analoiiy,  1  mean,  that  the  obvious  and  incontrovertible  sense 
of  clear  passages  of  Scripture  affords  a  rule,  by  which  we  may 
reason  analogically  concerning  the  meaning  of  obscure  passag- 
es ;  or  at  least,  by  which  we  may  shew,  what  obscure  passages 
cannot  mean.  F..  g.  God  is  a  spirit,  is  omniscient,  supreme,  the 
creator  and  governor  of  all  things,  &Cj  are  truths  so  plainly  anil 
2* 


I  8  ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS. 

incontrovertibly  taught  in  the  Scriptures,  that  all  the  passages 
whicli  would  seem  to  represent  liinti  as  material,  local,  limited 
in  his  knowledge  or  power,  &c,  are  to  be  interpreted  a,2;reeabl3' 
to  analogy  with  the  former  truths.  The  same  thing  holds  true 
of  other  doctrines  taught  in  the  same  perspicuous  manner.  We 
explain  what  is  doubtful  or  obscure,  by  the  application  to  it  of 
what  is  plain.  'I  his  rule  is  not  appropriate  to  the  Scriptures  on- 
ly. It  is  adopted  by  all  good  interpreters  of  profane  authors. 
It  is  a  rule  which  common  sense  prescribes  ;  and  is  therefore  well  . 
grounded. 

If  the  question  then  be  asked,  whether  Scriptural  analogy  of 
faith  is  a  rule  of  interpretation  ;  the  answer  must  readily  be  giv- 
en in  the  affirmative. 

But  the  analogy  of  the  faith  or  creed  of  any /jar^^/ of  Christians, 
taken  without  abatement,  cannot  be  applied  as  a  rule  of  exege- 
sis, unless  it  can  be  assumed,  that  the  whole  creed  of  that  party 
is  certainly  correct.  If  a  Romanist,  a  Lutheran,  a  Calvinist,  or 
a  Unitarian  avers,  that  the  Scriptures  are  to  be  construed 
throughout,  in  accordance  with  the  respective  Symbols  of  each  ; 
whom  are  we  to  credit?  The  creed  of  one  partj-,  in  seme  re- 
spects, contradicts  that  of  the  others.  Is  the  Scripture  then  to 
have  a  contrndiclory  exegesis  put  upon  it?  If  not,  the  analogy  of 
party-faith  cannot  be  our  rule  of  interpretation. 

In  Ihe  contest  about  the  analogy  of  faith  being  the  guide  of  in- 
terpretation, both  parties  have  usually  been  in  the  right,  in  some 
respects  ;  and  in  the  wrong,  in  others.  Comp.  Campbell's  Gos- 
pels, Prelim.  Dissert.  IV.  H  13.  14. 

§  35.  The  sense  of  Scripture  not  arbitrary.  Allowing'  the 
above  principles  to  be  correct,  it  is  plain  that  the  me- 
Ibod  of  investigating  the  sense  of  words  in  the  Scrip- 
tures, is  not  more  arbitrary  than  the  method  used  in  ex- 
plaining other  books  ;  but  equally  regulated  by  laws 
deduced  from  the  nature  of  language.  Those  then  act 
very  absurdly,  who  subject  the  interpretation  of  the 
holy  Scriptures  to  mere  human  opinion  ;  for  example, 
to  the  decision  of  a  Roman  pontiff,  as  if  this  could  deter- 
mine such  a  matter.     (Com.  §  31.  Note.) 

§  36.  We  must  not  hastily  conclude  any  sentiment  of  the 
Scriptures  to  be  unreasonable.  The  meaning*,  which  ac- 
cordmg  to  grammatical  principles  should  be  assigned  to 
any  word  of  Scripture,  is  not  to  be  rejected  then  on  ac- 
count of  reasons  derived  from  things  or  previously  con- 


ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS.  19 

ceivcd  opinions;  for,  in  this  way,  interpretation  would 
become  uncertain.  In  books  merely  human,  if  reason 
and  the  nature  of  the  subject  are  repugnant  to  the  ap- 
parent sense  of  the  words,  we  conclude  there  must  have 
been  either  a  fault  in  the  writer,  or  an  error  in  the 
copyist.  In  the  Scriptures,  if  any  sentiment  does  not 
agree  with  our  opinions,  we  must  remember  the  imbe- 
cilitj^  of  human  reason  and  human  faculties  ;  we  must 
seek  for  conciliation^  and  not  attempt  a  correction  of 
the  passage  without  good  authoritj^  It  is  wonderful, 
that  in  this  matter  more  reverence  should  be  paid  to 
mere  human  productions,  than  to  the  sacred  books. 

In  ancient  authors,  when  any  difficult}^  occurs,  we 
seek  for  correction  or  conciliation  ;  as  if  they  must  be 
rendered  avaf.tagTrjTOc^  faultless.  But  occasion  is  often 
taken  of  carping  at  the  writers  of  the  Scriptures,  or  of 
perverting  their  meaning  or  the  doctrines  v/hich  they 
teach. 

Nothing  can  be  more  appropriate  to  the  present  times,  than 
the  caution  of  Ernesti,  not  to  conclude  hastily  against  the  reason- 
ableness of  Scriptural  sentinaent.  Many  set  the  Scriptures  at  va- 
riance with  reason,  because  they  do  not  attain  the  real  meaning 
of  them.  Others  decide,  independently  of  the  Scriptures,  what 
must  be  true  ;  and  then,  whatever  is  found  in  the  sacred  books, 
which  thwarts  their  opinions,  they  reject  as  unreasonable.  The 
prudent  and  pious  interpreter  will  suspend  his  judgement,  in  cases 
of  difficulty,  and  investigate  with  great  patience  and  caution,  be- 
fore he  decides.  Multitudes  of  passages  in  sacred  writ  have  been 
satisfactorily  elucidated  by  critics  of  this  character,  which  have 
been  given  up  as  unreasonable  by  those  of  «fi  diiferent  character. 
The  time  is  coming,  (I  cannot  doubt  it,)  when  all  the  dark  pla- 
ces of  the  Bible  will  be  elucidated,  to  the  satisfaction  of  intelli- 
gent and  humble  Christians.  But  how  ntar  at  hand  that  blessed 
day  is,  I  do  not  pretend  to  know.  ''  The  Lord  hasten  it,  in  its 
time  I" 

§  37.  Interpretation  should  rather  be  grammatical  than 
doctrinal.  In  comparing  reasons  for  the  exegesis  of 
particular  passages,  greater  weight  should  be  attribut- 
ed to  grammatical  than  doctrinal  ones.  A  thing  may  be 
altogether  true  in  doctrine,  which  yet  is  not  taught  by 
some  particular  passage.     Books  of  theology  exhibit 


20  ON  THE  MEANING  OF  WORDS. 

many  doctrinal  interpretations,  consentaneous  indeed 
with  Christian  principles,  but  not  deduced  from  the 
words  interpreted ;  doctrinally  true,  but  not  grammati- 
cally. 

It  is  really  matter  of  regret,  to  find  in  most  of  the  old  and  dis- 
tinguished writers  on  theology,  such  a  multitude  of  passages  ad- 
duced as  proof-texts,  which,  when  hermeneutically  examined, 
proved  to  be  in  no  wise  adapted  to  esta!/lish  the  doctrine,  in  con- 
firmation of  which  they  were  cited.  It  mu«t  be  acknowledged, 
that  (he  pleasure  of  reading  many  very  valuable  work?>  of  this 
Dature,  is  greatlyabated  by  the  study  of  sacred  interpretation, 
which  teaches  more  correct  exegesis.  This  loss,  however,  is 
more  than  compensated,  by  the  deep  conviction  which  springs 
from  the  examination  of  genuine  proof  passages. 

§  38.  Real  contradiction  does  not  exist  in  the  Scriptures, 
As  the  books  of  Scripture  were  written  by  men  divine- 
ly inspired,  it  is  evident  there  can  be  no  real  contradic- 
tion in  them.  God  is  not  incapable  of  seeing  what  is 
consistent,  and  what  is  contradictory  ;  nor  can  he  for- 
get, when  he  speaks,  what  was  said  on  former  occa- 
sions. If  fl^/3are?if  contradictions  then  occur,  a  proper 
method  of  conciliation  is  to  be  pointed  out ;  of  which, 
in  another  place.     (Morus,  Vol.  II.  pp.  1 — 49.) 

§  39.  Every  interpretation  should  harmonize  with  the  de^ 
sign  of  the  writer^  and  with  the  context.  For  the  very 
reason  that  these  books  are  inspired,  every  interpreta- 
tion ought  to  agree  with  the  design  of  the  writer,  or 
harmonize  with  the  context.  We  admit  this  principle 
in  the  interpretation  of  profane  writers ;  much  more 
ought  we  to  admit  it  in  respect  to  the  Scriptures.  Mere 
men,  through  negligence  or  want  of  knowledge,  may 
insert  some  things  that  disagree  with  their  principal  de- 
sign ;  but  not  so  the  Holy  Spirit.  Hence,  the  certain- 
ty of  any  exegesis  is  connected  with  the  design  and  se- 
ries of  the  discourse.  Rules  of  caution,  however,  are 
important  here,  as,  in  its  proper  place,  will  be  shewa 
(Morus,  ut  supra.) 


21 


PART  I. 

CHAPTER  II. 

or  THE  KINDS  OF  AVORDS  AND  TITEIIl  VARIOUS  USE. 

[V\  ith  this  chapter  may  be  compared,  Keil  $  43,  and  H  73 — 
84.  Beck,  pp.  129—131.  Seller  };  41—64.  Lowth  on  lieb.  Fo- 
etrv,  Lect.  V— 12.] 

§  40.  Design  of  the  following  chapter.  The  former 
chapter  treated  of  the  connoxion  between  words  and 
ideas,  and  deduces  from  that  connexion,  several  funda- 
mental principles  for  the  interpretation  of  language. 
The  present  chapter  is  appropriated  to  the  considera- 
tion of  words  as  used  in  a  literal  or  tropical,  emphatic 
or  unemphatic  sense.  It  also  treats  of  words  as  em- 
ployed in  antithesis  ;  and  of  abstract  words  as  employed 
for  concrete  ones. 

All  these  things  belong  to  the  nature  of  languas^e.  as  employed 
(o  communicate  our  ideas  ;  and  therefore  are  properly  classed, 
by  ErR(;sti,  among  the  principles  of  language,  on  which  the  sci- 
ence of  Hermeneutics  is  built.  Morus  has  thrown  this  chapter 
into  his  preceptive  part,  and  thus  confounded  principle  with  />r«- 
cept.  The  rules,  which  grow  out  of  the  principles  here  develop- 
ed, are  exhibited  in  Part  il.  Chapters  V.  VI. 

§  41.  Importance  of  the  following  considerations.  It  is 
of  great  importance,  in  respect  to  finding  the  sense  of 
words,  to  be  acquainted  with  those  distinctions  which  af- 
fect the  sense,  and  alter  or  augment  the  meaning*. 

6  42.  Words  proper  and  tropical.  The  first  impor- 
tant division  or  distinction  of  words,  in  respect  to  their 
meaning,  is  into  proper  and  tropical^  i.  e.  literal  and  fig- 
urative, or  (better  still)  primary  and  secondary.  (Com- 
pare Morus,  p.  260.  II.) 


22^  OF  THE  KINDS  OF  WORDS 

A  proper  word  is  a  definite  name  given  to  a  certain  thing  ;  and 
as  such,  may  be  explained  by  adverting  to  the  proper  names  of 
persons.  A  tropical  word  is  one  used  out  of  its  proper  \.  e.  orig- 
inal sense  ;  e.  g.  rosyface^  snov)y  skin^  v/here  rosy  and  «noM?i/ can- 
not be  lilerally  or  ;7ro/?er/y  predicated  of  the  skin.  The  names  trope 
and  tropical  come  from  the  Greek  word  rgonog^  inversio^conver- 
sio. 

Tropes  arise  (1)  From  similitude^  real  or  supposed.  E.  g. 
The  vine  creeps.  This  is  called  metaphor.  (2)  From  conjunc- 
tion ;  which  is  either  physical  or  inlelleciualy  (i.  e.  supposed,  be- 
lieved.) Physical  or  real,  where  a  part  of  a  house  is  put  to  sig- 
nify the  whole;  or  the  container  for  the  thing  contained,  as  to 
offer  tkecup^  viz.  to  offer  what  is  contained  in  it,  i.  e.  the  wine. 
The  conjunction  is  intellectual  or  supposed,  when  the  cause  is  put 
for  the  effect,  and  vice  versa^  (e.  g.  blushing  for  modesty  ;)  the 
sign  for  the  thing  signified  ;  or  the  subject  lor  the  attribute. 
From  conjunction  arises  that  species  of  trope,  which  is  called 
metonymy, 

§  43.  Words  first  used  in  their  proper  sense.  Original- 
ly, words  were  undoubtedly  used  in  their  proper  sense ; 
for  they  were  invented  to  indicate  things,,  and  by  these 
things  they  raight  be  easily  explained,  without  any  am- 
biguity. A  small  number  of  words  sufficed,  at  an  ear- 
ly period  ;  because  there  were,  in  the  age  of  simplicity, 
but  few  objects  about  which  speech  could  be  employ- 
ed.    (Morus,  p.  262.  III.) 

What  Ernesti  says,  here  and  in  the  following  section,  about 
the  mode  of  forming  tropical  language  may  he  true  ;  but  there  are 
no  facts  to  sup{)ort  it.  On  the  contrary,  the  most  rude  and  bar- 
barous languages,  abound  most  of  all  in  words  used  figuratively. 
As  we  can  trace  no  languai,^e  back  to  its  original,  it  is  clear  that 
the  propositions  advanced  l)y  Ernesti  are  incapable  of  direct 
proof;  and  analogy,  so  far  as  we  can  go  back,  is  against  him. 
PJothing  can  be  more  destitute  of  proof,  than  a  great  part  of  the 
speculations  of  philosophizing  gramfiiarians,  about  the  original 
stale  of  language.  One  tells  us  that  the  language  of  barbarians 
has  but  few  words,  and  very  few  varieties  in  declension  ;  another, 
that  they  are  filled  with  0l>0}.iaT0nen0i7ifAeva  ;  another,  that  the 
roots  of  all  w.jrds  are  verba;  anottier,  that  they  are  nouns; 
another,  that  all  the  original  words  are  monosyllabic,  &c.  Some 
of  these  things  may  be  true  of  some  languages  ;  but  what  can  all 
such  speculators  say,  when  they  come  to  know  the  state  of  lan- 
guage among  our  Aborigines?  A  state  which  puts  at  defiance 
all  their  theories  ;  for  in  minutiae  of  declension  they  surpass  the 
Greek  or  even  the  multiform  Arabic  ;  and  in  niost  respects  they 


AXD  THEIR  VARIOUS  USES.  23 

differ  widely  from  that  state,  which  the  above  theory  would  teach 
us  to  be  necessary. 

§44.  Mode  of  forming  tropical  words.  But  in  pro- 
cess of  time,  objects  being  multiplied,  there  arose  ane- 
nessity  of  using  words  in  various  senses.  For  men  now 
began  to  think  and  speak  concerning  those  things  which 
had  hitherto  been  neglected ;  and  of  course  to  form 
ideas  of  them  in  their  minds,  or  to  describe  them  in 
words.  New  objects  also  were  invented  or  discovered, 
to  describe  which,  words  became  necessary.  To  serve 
this  necessity,  men  resorted  to  two  different  expedients. 
Either  new  words  were  coined,  or  old  ones  were  appli- 
ed to  new  objects.  In  those  languages,  that  were 
spoken  by  a  people  ingenious  and  devoted  to  science, 
or  in  those  which  by  nature  or  art  were  flexible  and 
fitted  for  the  coining  of  new  words,  new  ones  were 
most  usually  coined.  Yet  this  usage  was  not  without  ex- 
ceptions; for  had  new  words  been  coined  on  every  oc- 
casion, the  number  of  them  would  have  been  multipli- 
ed without  end.  In  languages  of  a  character  differ- 
ing from  that  just  mentioned,  there  was  a  greater  ne- 
cessity of  applying  the  same  word  to  the  designation  of 
several  things.  Hence  it  is,  that  a  language,  poor  as  to 
variety  of  words,  either  in  general  or  in  particular  parts 
of  speech,  employs  the  more  frequently  the  same  words 
in  different  senses.     (Morus,  p.  262.  III.) 

§  45.  Tropical  words  sotnetirnes  become  proper  ones.  But 
there  are  several  different  points  of  light,  in  which  trop- 
ical words  are  to  be  viewed  For^first^  the  primitive 
or  proper  signification,  strictly  understood,  often  be- 
comes obsolete,  and  ceases  for  a  long  period  to  be  us- 
ed. In  this  case,  the  secondary  sense,  which  original- 
ly would  have  been  the  tropical  one,  becomes  iheprop- 
er  one.  This  applies  specially  to  the  names  of  things. 
Hence,  there  are  many  words,  which  at  present  never 
have  their  original  and  proper  sense,  such  as  etymolo- 
gy would  assign  them,  (a)  but  only  the  secondary  sens- 
es, which  may  in  such  cases,  be  called  the  proper  sense. 
(Morus,  p.  264.  IV.) 
a)  E.  g.  In  English,  tragedy,  comedy,  villain,  pagan,  knave,  &c. 


24  OF  THE  KIXDS  OF  WORDS 

§  46.  Usage  sometimes  converts  tropical  words  into  prop- 
er ones.  Secondly^  in  like  manner,  the  tropical  sense  of 
certain  words  has  become  so  common,  by  usage,  that  it 
is  better  understood  than  the  orig-inal  sense.  In  this 
case  too  we  call  the  sense  proper ;  although,  strictly 
and  technically  speaking,  one  might  insist  on  its  being 
called  tropical.  If  one  should  by  his  last  will,  give  a  li- 
brary [bibliothecam]  to  another,  we  should  not  call  the 
use  of  bibliotheca  tropical  ;  although  strictly  speaking  it 
is  so,  for  bibliotheca  originally  meant  the  shelves  or  places 
where  books  are  deposited.     (Morus,  ibid.) 

§  47.  Tropical  names  become  proper  by  transfer.  So 
thirdly^  when  names  are  transferred  to  things  destitute 
of  them,  they  become  in  respect  to  these  things,  the 
same  as  proper  names  ;  as  when  we  predicate  luxurious' 
7iess  of  a  crop,  (a)  For  although  we  in  fact  use  the 
word  luxuriousness  metaphorically,  in  respect  to  the 
crop,  yet  in  this  case  the  word  may  be  called  a  proper 
one.  The  same  holds  true  of  perception  and  liberty^ 
when  predicated  of  the  human  mind;  and  so  of  many 
other  things.     (Morus,  ibid.) 

a)  So  the  Latin  acies^  ala^  corny,,  spoken  of  an  army  ;  t»nd,  in 
the  8aaie  way, /oo/  of  a  mountain^  head  of  a  river,,  or  bed  if  a  riv- 
er,, &c  ;  all  originally  proper  nouns  !i««ed  in  a  very  different  sense, 
but  now  they  have  become  proper  as  thus  used,  by  transfer. 

§  48.  Tropical  words  used  for  the  sake  of  variety  in 
expression.  Words,  moreover,  are  frequently  used  in  a 
tropical  manner,  without  any  necessity  arising  from  the 
occurrence  of  new  objects.  For  it  is  not  necessity  only, 
to  which  we  must  attribute  the  use  of  tropical  words, 
but  suavity  and  agreeableness  of  style  occasion  their  in- 
troduction. To  the  genius  and  habits  of  writers  much 
also  is  to  be  attributed.  For,  first,  tropes  are  used  for 
the  sake  of  variety  in  expression,^  so  that  the  same  word 
may  not  often  and  always  recur.  To  this  species  of 
tropical  language  belong  metonymy,  syecdoche,  and 
other  smaller  tropes.  In  every  thing,  variety  is  de- 
manded ;  and  without  it,  tedium  quickly  follows.  No 
person,  desirous  of  writing  elegantly  and  with  suavity, 


AND  THEIR  VARIOUS  USE.  S5 

will  fail  to  discern,  that  an  inriportant  part  of  a  good 
style  consists  in  using  variety  of  language.  (Morus,  p, 
266,  [.) 

Examples  ;  heaven  is  used  for  God^  sleep  for  death%  threshold 
for  house^  uncircumcision  for  Gentiles,  Sec. 

§  49.      Tropical  words  used  for  ornament.      But  se- 
condly, tropical  words,  specially  metaphors,  are  used, 
for  ornament.     In  metaphors,  which  are  the  most  coni-  \ 
mon  speciefs  of  tropes,  there  is  contained  a  similitude,   .\ 
reduced  to  the  narrow  compass  of  a  single  word  ;*  and-j| 
the  mind  is  delighted  with  metaphors,  because  we  are?/ 
so  formed  as   to  be   pleased   with  similitudes   and   im-  ^ 
ages,  specially  with  those  which  are  derived  from  ob- 
jects that  are  splendid  and  agreeable.     (Morus,  p.  267, 

11.) 

§  50.  Tropes  used  specially  for  ornament.)  by  poets  and 
orators.  The  more  desirous  a  writer  is  of  ornamenting 
his  discourse,  the  more  frequently  does  he  use  tropical 
language  ;  as  is  evident  from  the  style  of  poets  and  or- 
ators. And  it  is  with  the  special  design  that  their  style 
may  be  ornate,  that  w^e  concede  them  the  liberty  of 
frequently  employing  tropical  language. 

§  51.  The  frequency  of  tropes  depends  much  on  the  ge- 
nius  of  the  writer.  It  should  be  observed,  however, 
that  the  genius  of  a  writer,  and  the  subject  on  which 
he  writes,  are  intimately  connected  with  this.  Those, 
who  possess  great  fervour  of  imagination  and  vivid  con- 
ception, more  frequently  use  tropes,  even  bold  ones, 
and,  as  it  often  seems  to  others,  harsh  ones  also.  This 
results  from  the  fact,  that  they  easily  perceive  and  frame 
similitudes,  and  by  their  temperament,  are  excited  to 
make  comparisons.  Hence  they  often  content  them- 
selves with  slight  similitudes.  But  great  subjects,  by 
their  importance,  naturally  excite  most  men  to  the  ase 
of  tropes,  and  sometimes  of  splendid  ones.  (Morus,  p. 
288.  HI.  IV.  Lowth,  Lect.  V— XII.) 

Frorn  the  object  of  employina:  tropeg,  as  above   described,  we 
may  conchide  that  he  abuses  them,  who  interprets  them  etymo- 
3 


26  OF  THE  KINDS  OF  WORDS 

logically,  or  seeks  any  thing  more  in  them  except  variety  and 
ornament,  or  urges  too  far  exactness  in  estimating  the  limits  of 
meaning  in  tropical  phrases. 

§  52.  Tropes  used  from  necessity  differ  from  those  em- 
ployed for  variety  or  ornament.  From  these  principles 
we  may  understand,  that  in  ail  books,  but  specially  in 
the  Scriptures,  tropical  language  used  from  necessity 
differs  much  from  that  which  is  used  on  account  of  oth- 
er reasons.  In  the  first  case,  a  thing  has  a  definite  name, 
by  which  it  is  called :  in  the  other,  the  trope  is  used 
either  for  pleasure  or  ornament.  The  former  is  gram- 
matical ;  the  latter  rhetorical.  In  the  first,  the  reason 
of  the  trope  lies  in  analogy  of  nature;  in  the  second, 
it  lies  in  some  similitude.  And  since  every  thing  must 
have  some  name,  either  peculiar  or  common,  and  that 
name  belongs  to  the  thing  grammatically,  it  follows 
that  the  proper  sense  of  words  is  not  lost  in  a  grammat- 
ical trope,  but  only  in  a  rhetorical.  (Morus,  p.  270.  VI.) 

§63.  The  sense  of  tropical  words  is  grammatical.  But, 
as  may  be  easily  understood  from  what  has  been  said, 
since  the  meaning  of  all  tropical  words  as  well  as  proper 
ones,  is  deduced  from  the  purpose  and  design  of  those, 
who  employed  them  to  designate  certain  things,  (as  is 
plain  from  observation  ;)  it  appears  that  this  meaning  is 
grammatical  or  literal,  and  that  they  are  in  an  error, 
who,  with  Jerome,  have  thought  differently.  Interpre- 
tation is  of  the  same  name  nature^  whether  it  is  applied 
to  words  tropical  or  proper.     (Morus,  p.  271.  VII.) 

§  54.  Origin  of  synonymous  words.  From  the  custom 
of  using  tropical  language,  flow  synonymous  words.  In 
respect  to  these,  the  interpreter  must  beware,  lest  he 
seek  for  diversity  of  meaning,  where  none  really  exists ; 
which  not  unfrequently  hajjpens.  Usually,  in  the  same 
dialect  of  the  same  nation  and  age,  proper  words  are 
not  synonymous ;  but  when  synonymes  exist,  (as,  for  ex- 
ample, they  do  in  Greek,)  they  originate  from  differ- 
ent dialects  or  from  difterent  ages.     The  greatest  num- 


AND  THEIR  VARIOUS  USE.  27 

ber  of  sj^nonymes  arises  from  tropical  words,  which,  for 
the  sake  of  variety  and  ornament,  express  the  same 
idea  by  various  names.     (Morus,  p.  271.  VIII.) 

The  interpreter  should  not  seek  for  any  definite  distinction  be- 
tween !»ynon3'naes,  (1)  Where  they  are  introduced  for  the  sake 
of  variety.  (2)  Where  usage  conjoins  two  words  ;  as /wcfc  and 
fortune^  peace  and  quietness^  long  and  lasting^  &LC.  (3)  Where 
they  are  used  for  the  sake  of  ornament.  (4)  Where  excited  feel- 
ing produces  a  repetition  of  the  same  idea,  while  different  words 
fire  employed.  And,  (5)  Where  it  is  the  habit  of  an  author  to 
employ  synonyraes  ;  e.  g.  Cicero. 

The  Hebrew  poetry  affords  the  most  striking  exhibition  of  sy- 
nonymes,  in  its  synonymous  parallelisms  ;  where,  from  the  na- 
ture of  the  composition,  the  second  GTt^og  or  stanza  is  expect- 
ed, in  general,  to  exhibit  the  same  sense  as  the  first.  An  inter- 
preter would  mistake  the  essential  part  of  his  office,  if  he  should 
here  endeavour  to  exhibit  a  difference  between  the  sense  of  words, 
which  the  nature  of  the  composition  requires  to  be  regarded  as 
synonymes. 


GENERAL  NATURE  OF  EMPHASIS. 

§  55.  Definition  of  emphasis.  In  the  use  of  language, 
cases  arise,  where  the  ordinary  signification  of  a  word 
receives,  if  I  may  so  speak,  accession  or  augmentation. 
This  may  be  effected  in  two  ways ;  the  first  of  which 
consists  in  the  use  of  a  word  in  an  honorary  or  in  a  de- 
grading sense,  e.  g.  verba  svcf^^iag  et  dvoqjrjficag^  of 
which  it  would  Jbe  irrelevant  to  treat  here.  The  second 
class  of  words  are  those,  which  receive  augmentation  in 
their  extent  or  force  of  meaning.  These  constitute  what 
may  with  propriety  be  called  emphatic  words.  Emphasis 
then  may  be  defined ;  An  accession  to  the  ordinary  signi- 
fication of  a  word^  either  as  to  the  extent  or  the  force  of  its 
meaning.     (Morus,  p.  321.  II.) 

Emphasis  comes  from  e^KfCCvetv,  which  signifies  to  shcw^  op 
make  conspicuous.  It  is  to  language,  what  a  nod  or  a  sign  is  to 
looks;  i.e.  it  makes  more  significancy.  Examples:  when  the 
Jews  speak  of  Moses  by  the  appellation  of  the  Prophet ;  or  the 
Greeks  say,  the  Orator^  the  Philosopher ^  the  Poet,  meaning  De- 
mosthenes, Plato,  and  Homer;  these  respective  appellations  ar© 
emphatic. 


28  GENERAL  NATURE  OF  EMPHASIS. 

§  56.  JVo  word  of  itself  emphatic.  It  may  be  easily 
seen,  then,  that  no  word  of  itself  is  emphaiic.  Each 
word  has  by  itself  a  certain  power,  and  designates  a  de- 
finite idea  of  a  thing  either  small  or  great,  in  which 
there  can  be  no  emphasis.  It  is  not  because  a  word 
designates  any  thing,  which  is  very  grv^at  or  very  small, 
that  it  is  emphatical.  Were  this  the  case,  then  such 
words  as  God^  the  world^  the  sun^  the  king^  would  be  al- 
ways emphatical ;  which  surely  no  one  will  assert. 
(Morus,  p.  322.  III.) 

If  emphasis  be  an  occasional  accession  of  force  to  a  word,  then 
the  ordinary/  meaning  of  the  word,  be  the  signification  ever  so 
important  or  forcible,  of  course  is  not  emphatic. 

§  57.  Kinds  of  emphasis.  Emphasis  is  either  occa^ 
sional^  or  constant.  We  call  it  occasional^  when  it  is 
connected  with  words,  in  some  particular  place,  or  at  a 
certain  time.  From  the  animated  feelings  of  the  speak- 
er, or  from  the  importance  of  the  subject,  a  word  is 
chosen  to  express  more  than  its  ordinary  import.  Con- 
stant emphasis  is  that,  which  usage  makes  invariably  so, 
by  employing  a  word  continually  in  an  emphatic,  rather 
than  in  the  ordinary  sense.     (Morus,  p.  323.  IV.) 

Constant  emphasis,  if  admitted,  wouM  destroy  the  very  defini- 
tion which  Ernesti  has  sjiven  of  emphasis.  That  no  word  of  it- 
seh"  is  emphatic  ;  and  that  emphasis  is  an  accession  to  the  or- 
dinary force  of  a  word,  is  what  he  very  rightly  teaches  us.  What 
then  is  that  emphasis  which  is  constant  .^ 

§  58.  Emphasis^  how  known.  Occasional  emphasis 
must  be  known  by  the  context,  and  from  the  nature  of 
the  discourse.     (Morus,  p.  324.  V.) 

I  have  retained  Ernesti's  lansfuage  here,  in  respect  to  the  term 
occasional  or  temporary  as  he  calls  it.  But  as  occasional  empha- 
sis is  really  all,  which  from  the  nature  of  the  thing  can  ever  ex- 
ist, !  shall  not  hereafter  make  any  distinction,  but  speak  simply 
of  emphasis. 

The  nature  of  the  subject  and  the  context  are  the  only  means 
of  knovving  whether  a  word  is  to  be  regarded  as  emphaiic  ;  for 
these  must  shew  that  more  or  less  force  is  to  be  given  to  particu- 
lar terms.     As  a  general  rule,  we  may  say  that   emphasis  is  re- 


GENERAL  NATURE  OF  EMPHASIS.  .^9 

quired  whenever  a  frigid,  incongruous,  or  inept  sense  would  be 
made  without  it.  Thus  1  John  iii.  9.  He  that  is  born  ofGodsin* 
netk  not^  which  the  writer  does  not  mean  to  assert,  understand- 
ing the  word  sinneik  in  a  common  and  general  way  ;  but  he 
means  to  say  that  such  an  one  does  not  sin^  in  the  peculiar  sense 
of  which  he  is  speaking. 

As  to  constant  emphasis^  (which  Morus  and  his  editor  have  ad- 
mitted,) the  rule  for  determining  it  is  said  to  be  the  usus  loquen- 
di.  The  rule  is  good,  if  the  principle  be  admitted.  The  ex- 
amples given  to  support  this  species  of  emphasis  are  such  as  the 
names  Jehovah  applied  to  God,  and  Son  of  man  applied  to  (  hrist. 
But  these  prove  no  more,  than  that  these  appellations,  ap- 
plied in  certain  circumstances,  have  a  significant  and  exalted 
meaning  ;  which  is  true  of  very  many  words,  where  no  real  em- 
phasis is  to  be  found.  But  see  and  compare  Morus,  p.  325.  VI. 
VII. 

§  59.  No  ground  for  dividing  emphasis  into  real  and 
verbaL  Some  rhetoricians  divide  emphasis  into  real  and 
verbal:  the  former  of  which,  consists  in  the  greatness 
and  sublimity  of  things ;  the  latter  consists  of  words 
adapted  to  express  their  qualities.  But  this  division  is 
erroneous.  To  things  belongs  sublimity  ;  to  words^  em- 
phasis. Nor,  as  we  have  above  said,  does  a  word,  de- 
signating a  great  object,  therefore  become  emphatic. 
(Morus,  p.  328.  VIll.) 

§  60.  Tropical  words  are  not  of  course^  and  from  their 
nature^  emphatic.  Those  also  err,  who  make  every 
tropical,  specially  metaphorical  word,  emphatic.  In 
necessary  tropes,  or  those  used  for  the  sake  of  variety, 
it  i&  clear  there  can  be  no  emphasis.  Ornamental  tropes 
depend  on  mere  similitude,  which  serve  to  render  the 
discourse  agreeable.  Flagrare  cupiditate  means  no  more 
than  vehementer  cupere  ;  and  no  one  gets  a  different  idea 
from  using  it.  If  then  there  be  no  emphasis  in  the  lat- 
ter expression,  there  is  none  in  the  former.  The  er- 
ror arises  in  this  way,  that  some  understand^aorare  cu- 
piditate to  be  used  instead  of  cupere ;  and  thence  con- 
clude, that  there  is  an  accession  of  meaning.  Hence  we 
learn,  that  the  emphasis  of  tropical  words  is  to  be  found 
3* 


30  OP  ANTITHESIS. 

in  the  same  waj  as  that  of  proper  words.     (Morus,  p. 
329.  IX.)  ^ 

§  61.  Words  in  one  language  do  not  always  correspond 
exactly  to  those  in  another.  It  may  be  proper  to  repeat 
here  a  well  known,  though  very  important  and  neces- 
sary observation,  viz.  that  every  language  has  words 
and  phrases,  to  which  none  in  any  other  language,  or  at 
least  in  that  into  which  we  are  interpreting,  ea;aci/z/  cor- 
respond. Of  this  nature  are  many  words  and  phrases, 
both  in  the  Greek  and  Hebrew  Testament.  The  rea- 
son of  this  lies  not  solely  in  the  difference  of  objects, 
peculiar  to  every  nation;  such  as  pertain  for  example, 
to  laws,  religious  rites,  manners  and  customs,  k  ;  but 
also  in  the  variety  of  minds,  which  are  not  all  affected 
in  the  same  manner ;  and  lastly,  in  an  arbitrary  forma- 
tion of  notions,  respecting  those  things  which  do  not 
pertain  to  substance  and  essence.    (Campbell,  Diss.  II.) 

OF    ANTITHESIS. 

§  62.  Where  antithesis  exists^  if  the  sense  of  one  part 
can  be  founds  the  other  may  be  easily  known.  Finally,  as 
ideas  are  often  contra  distinguished  from  each  other, 
so  the  language  corresponds.  Therefore,  as  when 
ideas  are  repugnant  to  each  other,  if  you  understand  the 
one,  of  course  you  must  understand  the  other  which  is 
the  opposite,  (for  what  one  asserts  the  other  denies  ;) 
so  in  antithetic  language^  whether  the  subject  or  predi- 
cate of  a  sentence,  the  rule  is  obvious,  that  the  inter- 
pretation of  the  one  part  must  be  directed  by  that  of 
the  other,  which  is  understood  either  from  the  usus  lo- 
qiiendi.,  or,  v/here  this  is  various,  from  the  context.  E. 
g.  when  multi  and  pauci  occur  in  the  same  sentence, 
and  it  iS  evident,  that  jnulti  means  cf//,  it  is,  of  course, 
evident,  that  pauci  cannot  here  have  its  ordinary  sense, 
but  means  non  omnes^  without  limiting  the  idea  to  feW' 
ness  of  numbor.  Of  a  like  kind,  are  aa^^  and  uviVfiu; 
ygufifia  and  nvevfiUp  in  which  the  interpretation  of  the 


ABSTRACT  AND  CONCRETE  WORDS.  31 

one  is  to  be  accommodated  to  that  of  the  other.     (Morue, 
p.  167.  XIV.  1— II.) 

a)  But  if  multi  mpans  a//,  does  not  panci  (the  opposite  of  it) 
mean  none?  In  Hebrew,  irb  and  b^  ^^b  nriean  all  and  none  ; 
and  tb  i<)r  is  equivalent  to  non  omnes^  in  such  a  case. 

ABSTRACT  AND  CONCRETE  WORDS. 

§  63.  Abstract  words  used  for  concrete.  Nor  must  the 
interpreter  neglect  the  distribution  of  words  into  ab- 
stract  and  concrete.  All  languages,  specially  ancient 
ones,  often  use  abstract  terms  for  concrete  ones.  Gen- 
erally abstract  terms  are  most  frequently  employed. 

Abstract  words  are  the  names  of  qualities  or  attributes  ;  con- 
crete, of  thin2:s  or  subjects.  E.  g.  Divinity '\s  an  abstract  word, 
meaning  the  quality  of  divine  nature  ;  but  God  is  a  concrete 
term,  meaning  the  divine  agent  or  beings  The  former  is,  bj 
usage,  often  put  for  the  latter. 

§  64.  The  use  of  abstracts  for  concretes  arose  from  ne» 
cessity.  This  method  of  speaking  is  employed,  (1)  From 
necessity.  Those  languages,  which  have  but  a  few  con- 
crete terms,  necessarily  employ  abstract  ones  ;  e.  g.  the 
Hebrew  and  its  cognate  dialects,  in  which  abstracts  are 
often  used  in  the  place  of  concretes.  Such  usage  being 
once  established  by  necessity,  it  often  extended  itself 
where  necessity  did  not  require  it. 

§  65.  (2)  From  a  desire  to  render  the  subject  spoken 
of  prominent.  When  an  abstract  is  put  for  a  subject 
with  its  pronoun,  or  for  the  subject  itself,  it  directs  the 
mind  to  that  very  thing  on  account  of  which  the  predi- 
cate is  asserted.  No  one  will  deny  that  this  mode  of 
expression  is  energetic. 

§  66.  (3)  The  purpose  of  ornament  is  subserved,  not 
only  by  the  prominence  of  which  I  have  just  spoken, 
but  by  a  certain  elevation  and  grandeur  of  style,  con- 
Bected  with  this  mode  of  speaking. 


32  RULES  OF  INTERPRETATION. 

§  67.  Popular  and  learned  use  of  words.  Finally,  to 
some  words,  popular  use  attributes  one  meaning,  the 
usage  of  the  learned  another.  Not  that  words  natural- 
ly Signify  one  thing  in  common  life,  and  another  in  a 
treatise  of  science ;  but  that  they  are  used  less  skilfully 
in  the  one  case,  and  with  more  skill  and  accuracy  in  the 
other.  Interpreters  who  confound  these  usages,  of 
course  pervert  the  sense  of  words. 

PART    II. 


RULES  OF    INTERPRETATIOIT. 

CHAPTER  I. 

Introductory   Remarks, 

§  68.  Design  of  Part  11.  Thus  far  we  have  beea 
employed  in  considering  the  general  nature  of  language, 
the  various  kinds  of  words  in  use,  and  also  the  meaning 
appropriate  to  each  class.  Having  taken  this  general 
view  of  the  nature  and  properties  of  words,  we  may 
now  proceed  to  deduce  from  the  principles  already  es- 
tablished, various  Rules  of  Interpretation^  by  which  the 
efforts  of  the  interpreter  are  to  be  directed.  The  con- 
sideration of  these  rules,  with  their  various  classes  and 
ramifications,  will  constitute  the  second  part  of  the 
present  Treatise  on  Hermeneutics. 

§  69.  What  are  Rules  of  Interpretation  ?  They  are 
directions  or  formulas,  which  explain  and  define  the 
mode  of  rightly  investigating  and  perspicuously  repre- 
senting the  sense  of  words,  in  any  particular  author. 

§70.  Origin  of  these  rules.  They  are  deduced  from 
the  nature  of  language,  as  above  explained  ;  and  deduc- 
ed, not  by  logical  subtleties,  but  by  observation  and  ex- 
perience. 


RULES  OF  L\TERPIlETATIO^^  33 

§  71.  Object  of  Rules.  These  rules  serve  not  only 
to  assist  in  finding-  the  sense  of  words,  but  also  in  judg- 
ing" whether  any  particular  sense  put  upon  words  be 
true  or  false.  By  them  too  one  may  not  only  be  assist- 
ed to  understand  why  a  particular  sense  is  erroneous, 
but  also  why  the  true  one  cannot  be  discovered. 

§  72.  Rules  of  exegesis  connected  with  the  usus  loquen' 
di.  We  have  seen  above,  that  the  sense  of  words  de- 
pends on  the  usus  loquendi.  Proper  rules  then  for  find- 
ing the  sense,  or  judging  of  it,  ought  to  have  special 
respect  to  the  usus  loquendi^  and  to  show  how  it  is  ap- 
plied to  every  particular  case. 

§  73.  Usus  loquendi  general  and  special.  The  usus 
loquendi^  considered  at  large,  has  respect  to  a  language 
generally ;  specially  considered,  it  has  respect  to  some 
particular  writer.  To  the  common  usage  of  words,  al- 
most every  writer  adds  something  that  is  peculiar  to 
himself;  whence  arise  the  idioms  of  particular  writers. 

§  74.  Order  in  which  the  subject  will  he  pursued.  The 
natural  method  of  treating  the  usus  loquendi  will  be 
followed :  so  that  we  shall  first  consider  the  method,  in 
general,  of  findmg  the  usus  loquendi  in  the  dead  languag- 
es ;  and  then  the  method  of  finding  it  in  any  particular 
authors,  and  specially  in  the  writings  of  the  N.  Test. 


54 

PART   II. 

CHAPTER  II. 

OP  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI  GENERALLY  IN  THE  DEAB 
LANGUAGES. 

[Compare  Keii,  H  25—34.   Beck  pp.  131  —  136.  Seiler,  H  236— 
254.] 

§  75.  Usus  loquendi  is  known  by  testimony.  If  the 
vsus  loquendi  is  mere  matter  of  fact,  it  may  be  known, 
in  the  dead  languages,  by  the  testimony  of  those,  who 
lived  when  these  languages  were  flourishing  and  in 
common  use,  and  who  well  understood  them.  This  tes- 
timony is  direct  or  indirect.     (Morus,  p.  74.  II.) 

By  the  usus  loquendi  is  meant,  the  sense  which  usage  attaches 
to  tlie  vfords  of  any  language.  It  is  surprising  that  any  attempts 
should  ever  have  heen  made  to  find  the  sense  of  words  in  a  dead 
languag:e,  by  mtaus  different  in  their  nature  from  those  which  we 
employ,  to  find  the  sense  of  words  in  a  livins:  language.  The 
meaning  of  a  word  must  always  be  a  simple  matter  of  fact ;  and 
of  course,  it  is  always  to  be  estahlished  by  appropriate  and  ade- 
quate testimony.  Yet  how  very  different  a  course  has  been  pur- 
sued, I  will  not  say  by  many  Rabbinic,  Cabbalistic  commenta- 
tors merely,  nor  by  monks  and  zealots  for  the  ilomish  hierarchy  ; 
but  by  many  Protestants,  who  have  had  great  influence,  and  who 
deserve,  on  many  accounts,  the  hig:hest  respect.  Witness  the 
exegetical  principles  of  Cocceius  and  his  followers;  and  read,  if 
the  statement  just  made  be  doubted,  many  of  the  articles  in  Park- 
hurst's  Heb.   Lexicon. 

§  76.  How  to  obtai7i  direct  testimony.  Direct  iesti- 
mony  may  be  obtained.  Firsts  from  those  writers,  to 
whom  the  language  investigated,  was  vernacular ; 
either  from  the  same  authors  whom  we  interpret, 
or  from  their  contemporaries.  JVcaV,  from  those  who, 
though  foreigners,  had  learned  the  language  in  ques- 
tion, (a)    Thirdly^  from  Scholiasts,  Glossographers,  and 


OP  FINDING  THE    USUS  LOQITENDI  35 

Versions  made  while  the  language  was  spoken  and  by 
those  who  were  acquainted  with  it.  But  these  must  be 
severally  treated. 

c)  Thus  the  writinsrs  of  Marcus  Antoninus  a  Ronaan  emperor, 
and  of  Philo  and  Josephus  who  were  Jews,  may  be  used  to  ilhis- 
trate  the  meaning  of  Greek  words,  because,  although  foreigners, 
they  well  understood  the  Greek  language. 

§  77.  Testimony  of  cotemporary  writers.  The  most 
important  aid  is  afforded  by  writers  of  the  first  class ; 
for  their  testimony  is  particularly  weighty.  This  tes- 
timony may  be  drawn  from  three  sources.  (1)  From 
the  definitions  of  words.  (2)  From  examples  and  the 
nature  of  the  subject.  (3)  From  parallel  passages. 
(Morus,  p.  79.  V.) 

§  78.  (1)  Definitions,  In  regard  to  these,  nothing 
more  is  necessary,  than  to  take  good  care  that  the  de- 
finition be  well  understood  ;  and  to  consider  how  much 
weight,  the  character  of  the  writer  who  defines  may 
properly  give  to  it. 

§  79.  (2)  Examples  and  the  nature  of  the  subject.  In 
regard  to  these,  it  may  be  said,  that  a  good  understand- 
ing and  considerable  practice  is  necessary  to  enable 
one  to  judge  well,  and  to  make  proper  distinctions, 
(Morus,  p.  81.  VII.) 

By  examples  is  meant,  that  the  writer  who  uses  a  particular 
word,  although  he  does  not  directly  define  it,  yet  gives,  in  some 
one  or  more  pasaagt  s,  an  fxample  of  what  it  meafjs,  by  exhibit- 
ing its  qu.'^lities.  or  shewing  the  operation  of  it.  Thus,"Paul  uses 
the  words  orocysia  tov  xoojaov,  at  first,  without  an  explana- 
tion. But  w.  have  an  exarnpje  uf  the  meaning  of  it  in  Gal.  iv.  9. 
Thus  TCVOTvg  is  illustrated  b^  examples  in  Heb  xi ;  and  so,  of 
m^ny  other  words. 

The  nature  nf  the  subject^  in  innumerable  places,  helps  to  6e- 
fine  which  meaning  of  a  word  the  writer  attaches  to  it,  m  any 
particular  passage  E.  g  XaQig  is  pardon  of  sin^  divine  benev- 
olence, divine  aid^  temporal  blessings^  !^c»  Which  of  these  senses 
it  bears  in  any  particular  passage,^  is  to  be  determined  from  the 
nature  of  the  subject. 


36  OF  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI. 

§  80.  (3)  Comparison  of  parallel  passages.  Great 
caution  is  necessary  here,  in  order  to  find  tne  true  sense 
of  those  passages  which  are  to  be  compared  and  judg- 
ed of,  with  a  view  to  throw  light  on  some  more  obscure 
place.  Unless  such  caution  is  used,  the  object  cannot 
be  well  accomplished.  On  this  account,  the  prin- 
ciple in  question  ought  to  be  well  understood ;  es- 
pecially, as  all  who  are  skilled  in  interpretation  agree, 
that  this  principle  of  exegesis  is  very  broad,  and  ap- 
plies not  only  to  the  Scriptures^  but  to  all  other  books. 
(Morus,  p.  79.  VIII.) 

§  81.  Parallelisms  are  Verbal  and  Real  (1)  Verbal. 
This  occurs,  when  a  word  is  ambiguous  and  doubtful, 
(because  neither  the  subject  nor  the  context  affords 
matter  of  illustration,)  and  this  same  word,  (a)  or  its 
synonyme,  (6)  is  repeated  in  a  similar  passage,  with 
those  attributes  by  which  it  may  be  defined,  or  with 
some  plain  adjunct,  or  intelligible  comment,  (c)  (Mo- 
rus, p.  85.  X.  XI.) 

The  sense  of  many  words  is  so  plain,  that  investig^ation  by 
parallelism,  i.  e.  the  like  use  of  them  in  other  passages,  is  un- 
necessary. But  comparison  is  specially  necessary  to  illustrate 
words  (1)  Which  belong  to  the  Hellenistic  or  Hebrew-Greek 
idiom.  E.  %.  fCpOi^OVPTO  navTsg  is  often  said,  when  the  event 
to  which  it  relates  is  some  special  favour.  The  language  here 
may  be  compared  with  the  Hebrew  ^?'l'^  and  TiHS,  or  the  syno- 
nyriies  {^avjuaocci  and  -O^a^l^rjOai ;  by  which  it  appears  that 
6(fO^OVVTO^  in  such  cases,  u»eans  admiration^  astonishment.  (2) 
Words  shuuld  be  compared,  which  have  a  kind  of  technical  re- 
li2:ious  use.  E.g.  fAVGTTjQtOV.  romp.  Rom.  16:  24,  Colos.  1:27, 
Eph.  3 :  45.  So  mOTig,  dixaioovprjj  fxtxavoia,  Kaivri 
KriGtg,  &c.  (3)  Words  of  unfrequent  occurrence.  The  neces- 
sity of  this  is  obvious.  (4)  Words  which  are  ambiguous.  For 
words  which  are  so  in  one  place,  frequently  are  plain  and  easy 
to  be  understood  in  another,  from  the  connexion  in  which  they 
stand. 

a)  E.  g.  Christ  is  frequently  called  a  stone  of  stumbling.  In 
1  Pet.  2:  8,  those  who  stumble  are  said  anSidsLV  rot  Ao/w,  to 


eE]<JERALLY  fN  THE  DEAD  LANGUAGES.  37 

ye/cc/  or  disobey  the  gospel  of  Christ.  (Jb)  F.  s:.  2  Cor.  1:21, 
XQLGag  f]fA(xg  6  Seog  ;  I  John,  2t  20  X9*'^M^  ^^  ^^^^  *^  ^® 
instruction  in  the  truth,  (e)  Coinp  2  Cor.  4:  10  wiUi  v-rse  11th. 
Parallelisms,  appropriately  so  called,  are  of  this  nature  ;  ihe 
one  often  serving  to  explain  the  other  These  are  very  numerous 
in  the  Old  Testament,  and  considerably  so  in  the  New.  Comp. 
Matt.  1:20  with  Luke  1:35. 

To  the  cases  already  mentioned  may  be  added,  {(f)  Renewed 
mention  with  explanation.  Comp.  1  Cor.  7:  1  with  verse  26. 
Also  (c)  Renewed  mention  with  antithesis.  Comp.  dccvaxog 
in  Rom.  iii.  iv.  and  v.  with  Chap.  6:  23. 

§  82.  Real  Parallelism.  This  means,  that  there  is  a 
parallelism  of  object  or  sentioient,  although  the  words 
are  not  the  same  ;  or  to  describe  it  in  a  manner  some- 
what different,  it  occurs,  when  the  same  thing-  or  senti- 
ment is  expressed  in  other  words  more  perspicuous,  or 
with  fuller  and  more  numerous  words,  the  meaning  of 
which  is  plain. 

Real  parallelism  may  respect  a/ac/,  or  a  doctrine,  related  or 
taught  in  different  passages.  Examples  of  the  former  are  abund- 
ant in  the  Gospels,  which,  in  very  numerous  instances,  relate  to 
the  same  facts.  So  in  the  books  of  Samuel  and  Kings,  compared 
with  the  Chronicles. 

Paralleh'sm  of  doctrine  or  sentiment  is  where  the  same  princi- 
ples are  taught,  in  both  passages.  To  this  head  of  parallelism 
belong  repetitions  of  the  same  composition;  e.g.  Ps.  14  and 
53;  Ps.  96  and  I  Chron.  16;  Ps.  18.  and  2  Sam  22  ;  some  of 
Jude  and  2  Epistle  of  Peter;  with  many  other  such  passages. 
On  the  faithful,  skilful,  and  diligent  comparison  of  the  different 
parts  of  Scripture,  which  treat  of  the  same  doctrine,  depends,  in 
a  great  measure,  all  our  right  conclusions  in  regard  to  the  real 
doctrines  of  religion  ;  for  in  this  manner,  and  this  only,  are  they 
properly  established.  Most  of  the  mistakes  m^de  about  Chris- 
tian doctrine,  are  made  in  consequence  of  partial  exe2;esi8,  di- 
rected not  unfrequently  by  prejudices  previously  imbibed.  The 
student  cini  never  feel  too  deeply  the  importance  of  a  thorough 
comparison  of  all  those  parts  of  Scripture^  which  pertain  to  the 
same  subject. 

Besides  the  verbal  and  real  parallelism  considered  above,  there 
is  another  species  of  parallelism,  which  constitutes  one  of  (he 
principle  features  of  Hebrew  poetry.  This  consists  in  a  corres- 
pondence of  two  parts  of  a  verse  with  each  other,  so  that  words 
answer  to  words,  and  sentiment  to  sentiment.  This  runs  through- 
out the  books  of  Job,  Psalms,  Proverbs,  Canticles,  and  most  of 
the  Prophets.  See  Pa.  1.  2.  19.  119.  Is.  1:  2—5.  40.  et  passim. 
4 


38  OF  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI 

This  style,  so  predominant  in  the  language  of  the  Old  Testament, 
has  passed  into  many  parts  of  the  New,  which  strictly  speaking 
are  not  poetical  ;  but  which  receive  their  hue  from  the  influence 
that  Hebrew  poetry  had  produced  on  the  lang-uag^e  of  the  Jew* 
ish  nation.  See  Luke  1;  35.  1:  46,  &;c.  11 :  27;  and  many  parts 
of  the  Apocalypse,  which  is  a  kind  of  poem.  The  attentive  and 
experienced  observer,  will  find  these  characteristic  idioms  of  He- 
brew poetry,  in  a  greater  or  less  degree,  in  almost  every  chap- 
ter of  the  New  Testament. 

The  appropriate  method  of  studying  this  part  of  exegesis  con- 
sists, of  course,  in  attention  to  Hebrew  poetry.  How  great  as- 
sistance may  be  derived  from  a  thorough  knowledge  of  this  id- 
iom, one  can  scarcely  imagine,  who  has  not  made  the  experi- 
ment. I  cannot  dwell  upon  it  here,  except  merely  to  observe,  that 
the  student  will  be  in  no  great  danger  of  overrating  the  benefit  to 
be  derived  from  a  thorou§;h  acquaintance  with  it;  and  that  he 
will  find  the  advantages  very  perspicuously  stated  by  Schleusner, 
De  paiallelismo  membroram  egregio  interprelationis  subsidio. 

As  Ernesti  has  failed  to  consider  the  appropriate  maxims  of 
exegesis,  in  regard  to  the  kind  of  parallelisms  now  in  question,  I 
will  add  a  few  considerations,  that  may  be  useful.  (I)  In  par- 
allelism of  this  kind,  seek  for  the  principal  idea,  that  lies  at  the 
ground  of  both  parts  of  a  distioh.  (2)  lie  not  anxious  to  avoid 
the  same  sense  or  meaning  in  both  parts,  as  though  it  would  be 
tautological,  and  unworthy  of  the  sacred  writers  ;  for  sameness 
of  meaning,  in  innumerable  cases,  constitutes  the  very  nature  of 
the  idiom,  or  mode  of  expression.  (3)  Inquire  whether  one 
member  of  the  parallelism  is  explanatory;  or  whether  it  is  add- 
ed for  the  sake  of  ornament;  or  is  a  repetition  or  amplification, 
which  result  from  excited  feeling,  or  from  mere  custom  of  speech. 
This  inquiry  will  enable  one  to  know  how  mucli  exegetical  aid 
may  be  derived  from  it.  If  one  member  be  explanatory  or  ex- 
egetical of  the  other,  it  will  comprize  synonymous  or  antithetic 
words  ;  or  one  member  will  be  in  tropical,  and  the  other  in  prop- 
er language  ;  or  one  will  enumerate  species,  which  belong  to  the 
genus  mentioned  in  the  other.  Instructive  on  the  above  subject 
is  Morus,  pp.  96—107. 

But  the  student  must  not  fail  here,  to  read  Lowth's  Lectures  on 
Hebrew  Poetry^  or  the  Preface  to  Lowllis  Commentary  on  Isaiah. 
With  much  profit,  may  be  read,  on  this  very  interesting  and  im- 
portant branch  of  a  sacred  interpreter's  knowledge.  Herder, 
Geist  der  Heb,  Poesie,  B.  I.  s.  22,  Sec.  De  Wette,  Ueber  die 
Psalmen,  Einleitun^.     Meyer,  Hermeneutik^  B.  II.  s. 

§  83.  Parallel  passages  to  be  read  continuously  and  fre- 
quently. A  good  interpreter,  therefore,  must  speclalljr 
attend  to  those  passages  of  an  author,  which  resemble 


GENERALLY  IN  THE  DEAD  LANGUAGES.         39 

each  other,  when  he  finds  occasion  to  doubt  in  respect 
to  the  meaning  of  any  one  of  them.  He  should  read 
them  over  continuously,  or  at  short  intervals.  For  in 
this  way,  while  the  passages  are  fresh  in  his  mind  about 
which  he  doubts,  or  with  which  others  are  to  be  com- 
pared, he  will  more  easily  trace  the  real  resemblances 
between  them.     (Morus,  p.  107.  XVIII.) 

§  84,  Similarity  of  passages  should  be  real,  in  order  to 
be  compared^  and  not  merely  verbal.  By  this  is  meant, 
that  the  same  idea  is  presented  by  both,  and  not  mere- 
ly that  the  language  of  each  may  be  the  same.  For  real 
likeness  between  them  cannot  exist,  unless  the  idea  of 
each  be  the  same  ;  nor,  of  course,  can  the  one  throw 
any  true  light  upon  the  other,  except  there  be  a  real 
similarity.  But  when  this  point  is  settled,  the  inter- 
preter must  consider  which  of  the  two  is  the  most  per- 
spicuous and  definite,  and  regulate  the  exegesis  of  the 
more  obscure  passage  by  that  which  is  the  more  per- 
spicuous. Explanation,  in  this  way,  often  becomes  very 
obvious.     (Morus,  p.  107.  XIX.) 

But  is  there  not  a  kind  of  VGxeQOv  uQOreQOV,  in  this  direc- 
tion ?  Morus  has  indeed  admitted  the  propriety  of  the  rule  ;  but 
still  there  seems  to  me  to  be  difficulty  in  it.  In  order  to  deter- 
mine whether  two  passages  may  be  properly  compared,  (one  of 
which  \^  obscure)  you  musi  first  determine  whether  there  is  real 
similarity  between  them,  i.  e.  whether  they  both  contain  the 
same  idea.  But  to  determine  this,  of  course,  implies  a  previous 
knowledge  of  what  the  obscure  passage  contains  ;  otherwise  yea 
cannot  tell  whether  the  idea  is  the  same  in  both.  You  have  al- 
ready determined,  then,  how  the  obscure  passage  is  to  be  inter- 
preted, and  so  need  not  the  comparison  after  which  you  are  la- 
bouring ;  or  else  you  assume  the  interpretation,  and  then  build 
your  exegesis  on  that  assumption.  In  either  way,  the  rule  would 
seem  to  amount  to  little  or  nothing. 

But  to  relieve  the  difficulty,  in  some  measure,  it  may  be  said 
with  truth,  you  determine  what  idea  is  conveyed  in  each  of  the 
passages  to  be  compared,  from  the  context,  and  the  design  of  the 
writer,  or  the  nature  of  the  case.  Having  made  this  determina- 
tion about  each  passage,  independently  of  the  other,  you  then 
bring  them  together,  and  the  one,  being  expressed  more  fully  or 
with  more  explanatory  adjuncts  than  the  other,  confirms  the  less 
certain  meaning  of  the  other.  A  comparison  of  passages,  then, 
which  is  real^  (that  of  ideas)  and  not  merely  verbal,  can  never 


40  OF  FINDING  THE  tSUS  LOQ.UENDI 

be  made  to  any  purpose,  where  the  obscurity  of  either  is  so  ^reaf, 
tiidt  you  can  attain  no  tolerable  degree  of  satisfaction  about  the 
meaning.  It  can  never  be  used,  therefore,  for  any  higher  degree 
of  evidence,  than  for  the  confirmation  of  a  sense  not  improbable 
in  itself,  find  not  contradicted  by  the  context. 

This  subject,  in  such  a  view  of  it,  becomes  fundamental,  in 
regard  to  the  validity  of  testimony  to  the  meaning  of  ^^ords,  af- 
forded by  what  are  called  parallel  passages.  The  nature  t*nd 
strength  of  the  evidence,  and  the  proper  mode  of  its  application 
are  ali  illustrated  by  the  above  considerations.  Unless  the  stu- 
dent forms  ideas  of  this  subject,  n^hich  are  correct,  and  ground- 
fed  upon  principle  that  will  bear  examination,  he  is  liable  to  be 
carried  about  '*  by  every  wind  of  doctrine"  in  Hermeneutir's,  and 
to  be  cast  upon  the  opinion,  or  conceit,  or  merely  confident  as- 
sertion of  every  commentator  or  lexicographer,  who  has  over- 
rated the  authority  of  passages  called  parallel,  in  deciding  upon 
some  particular  word  or  phrase,  or  who  has  no  definite  views  of 
the  exact  nature  and  application  of  the  evidence  in  question. 

§  85.  The  exercise  of  comparison  should  he  often  re- 
peated. To  the  observance  of  these  principles,  fre- 
quent practice  must  be  added,  so  that  the  interpreter 
may  easily  discern  what  passages  are  similar,  and  how 
he  maj  rightly  compare  them,  and  judge  of  them.  It 
will  be  very  useful,  here,  to  consult  good  interpreters^ 
not  only  of  the  Scriptures,  but  of  profane  authors;  that 
where  they  carry  these  principles  into  practice,  and 
plainly  make  a  right  and  skilful  application  of  them, 
we  may  learn  to  imitate  them,  by  attentively  consider- 
ing the  manner  in  which  they  attain  to  the  understand- 
ing of  things  which  are  obscure  or  ambiguous.  By/re- 
quently  renewing  this  exercise,  we  may  learn  to  go  in 
the  same  path,  in  which  they  have  travelled. 

The  books  of  the  New  Testament  present  more  inducement  to 
repeat  this  exercise  very  frequently,  than  any  other  books.  For 
(I)  They  are  of  all  books  the  most  important.  (2)  They  are 
not  only  all  of  the  same  idiom  in  general,  but  they  have  refer- 
ence to  the  same  subject,  viz.  the  developeraent  of  Christianity. 
They  originated  too  from  cotemporary  writers,  possessed  of  views, 
feelinj^s,  and  lanjruage  that  were  alike.  Hence,  comparison  has 
more  force  in  illustrating  the  N\  Testament,  than  in  the  illustra- 
tion of  either  Greek  or  Latin  authors;  many  of  whom,  that  agreed 
with  each  other  in  all  the  circumstances  just  stated,  cannot  be 
found.  But  (3)  To  all  who  admit  that  the  same  Holy  Spirit  guided 
the  authors  of  the  New  Testament,  and  that  their  views  ofrelig- 


GENERALLV  IiV  THE  DEAD  LANGUAGES.         41 

it)n,  ID  consequence  of  this,  must  have  been  harmonious^  the  in- 
ducement to  comparison  of  various  parts  and  passages  with  each 
other,  in  order  to  obtain  a  correct  view  of  the  wliole,  must  be 
very  great;  and  the  additional  force  of  the  evidence  arising  from 
comparison,  on  account  of  the  really  harmonious  views  of  the 
writers,  must  make  this  exercise  an  imperious  dutj  of  every 
theologian. 

§  86.  Many  parallel  passages  should  be  compared.  To 
compare  one  passage  only,  is  often  insufficient,  wheth- 
er you  are  endeavouring  to  find  the  usus  loquendi  by 
the  aid  of  parrallel  passages,  or  by  testimony  derived 
from  the  nature  of  the  subject  and  from  examples. 
(Comp.  §  77.)  Specially  is  this  the  case,  when  we  are 
investigating  the  sense  of  words,  that  have  a  complex 
or  generic  meaning,  made  up  of  various  parts.  In  this 
case,  comparisons  should  be  made  from  numerous  pas- 
sages, until  we  perceive  that  what  we  are  seeking  is 
fully  and  entirely  discovered.  (Morus,  p.  109.  XX.) 

Suppose  the  word  niGTcg  occurs  in  a  particular  passage,  where 
you  are  doubtful  what  sense  should  be  applied  to  it.  First,  you 
call  to  mind,  that  niGTigis  a  generic  word,  having  several  mean- 
ings related  to  each  other,  but  still  diverse,  as  species  under  the 
genus.  You  wish  to  determine  how  many  species  of  meaning 
ncaig  has  ;  and  in  order  to  accomplish  this,  many  passages  where 
it  is  used  must  be  compared,  in  order  that  you  may  know  wheth- 
er all  the  species  are  found.  This  being  done,  you  proceed  to 
compare  them  with  the  passage  under  investigation,  and  see 
which  will  fit  it.  And  in  this  way  all  generic  words  must  be  in- 
vestigated, before  the  generic  idea  can  be  determined. 

§  87.  Testimony  of  Scholiasts  respecting  the  usus  loqueu' 
di.  It  was  said,  §  76,  that  testimony  to  linguistic  usage 
might  be  derived  from  Scholiasts  ;  and  this  testimony  is 
either  given  by  themselves,  or  it  is  cited  by  them  from 
others.  It  is  valuable,  in  proportion  as  the  time  in 
wrhich  they  lived  approximates  to  the  age  of  the  author 
whom  they  interpret;  (a)  and  also  in  proportion  to  ^ 
their  knowledge  of  the  language  in  which  he  wrote.  (&) 
The  latter  must  be  judged  of  by  men  of  learning  and 
practical  skill ;  although  to  judge  of  it  is  not  a  matter 
of  special  difficulty.     (Morus,  pp.  113 — 115.) 


42  OF  FINDING  THE  US  US  LOQ.UENDI 

Scholia  means  short  notes  upon  any  author,  either  of  an  exe- 
|:etical  or  graoimatical  nature.  On  all  the  distinguished  ancient 
Greek  authors,  SchoHa  have  been  written  in  more  recent  times  ; 
many  volumes  of  which  are  still  extant,  upon  Homer,  Thucydidea, 
Sophocles,  Aristophanes,  &c.  In  like  manner,  a  multitude  of 
Scholia,  from  the  ancient  Christian  Fathers,  specially  of  the 
Greek  Church,  have  come  down  tons  in  their  works.  Orij^inally, 
they  were  brief  remarks,  occasionally  made  in  their  commenta- 
ries and  other  writings.  Afterwards,  thrse  were  extracted  and 
brought  together,  and^  they  now  form  what  is  called  Catena  Pa-^ 
trum.  Many  Scholia  also  are  found  on  the  margin  of  MSS.  or  in- 
terlined, or  placed  at  the  end  of  a  book. 

a)  This  is  too  generally  expressed ;  for  surely  an  ignorant 
Scholiast  of  the  second  century  would  not  be  more  valuable  than 
Chrysostom  in  the  fourth  !  In  short,  antiquity  adds  nothing  to 
the  value  of  a  Scholiast,  except  as  it  renders  it  more  probable, 
ceteris  paribus,  that  he  may  have  a  better  knowledge  of  ancient 
manners,  customs,  history,  &:c,  than  a  modern  writer  would 
have. 

b)  Almost  all  that  is  important  in  this  subject  turns  on  *his 
point.  The  simple  question  always  is.  Is  the  author  well,  skil- 
fully interpreted  ;  not,  when  or  where  the  Commentator  lived. 

§  88.  Glossaries.  In  a  similar  way  is  the  testimony 
of  Glossographers  to  be  estimated  ;  which  testimony  is 
by  no  means  to  be  despised.  Its  credit  depends  on  its 
antiquity,  and  on  the  learning  either  of  the  Glossogra- 
phers themselves,  or  of  others  whom  they  cite. 

§  89.  Nature  of*  Glossaries.  But  here  we  must  be 
cautious,  not  to  suppose  the  Greek  Glossaries  to  be 
like  our  modern  Lexicons.  They  explain  only  partic- 
ular passages,  or  words ;  especially  nouns  that  are  in 
an  oblique  case,  or  verbs  that  are  not  in  the  Infinitive, 
nor  first  person  of  the  Present  Tense.  An  ignorance 
of  this  construction  of  the  Glossaries,  has  often  been 
the  occasion  of  ridiculous  errors. 

Glossarium  is  a  book  or  writing  comprehending  yXcaooag. 
Among  the  Greeks,  ykwOGU  meant  either  zrfeowmhc  f/'orrf,peculiar 
to  a  certain  dialect  only,  and  itnknown  in  others  ;  or  obsolete  word; 
or  obscure  one.  Glossary  means  a  hook,  coutaininer  explanations 
of  obscure  and  difficult  words.  Of  course,  a  Glossary  extends 
only  to  a  few  of  the  words  and  phrases  of  any  author.  It  is  not 
to  be  used  at  a  lexicon ;   for  it  is  only  a  commeat  ou  particular 


GENERALLY  IN  THE  DEAD  LANGUAGES.         43 

passages.  It  differs,  therefore,  in  nothing  except  mere  form,  from  . 
very  brief  Scholia, 

As  to  the  authority  of  Glossaries,  it  is  regulated  by  the  same 
principles  as  that  of  Scholia  ;  mere  antiquity  of  itself  adding  no- 
thing important  to  its  weight,  which  is  proportioned  to  the  phi- 
lological knowledge  and  accuracy  of  its  author. 

The  principal  ancient  Glossaries  published,  are  those  of  He- 
sychius,  Suidas,  Phavorinus,  Cyrill,  Photius,  Et^mologicon  Mag- 
num. Compare,  on  this  note  and  the  two  preceding  Sections, 
Morus,  pp.  115--130. 

§  90.  Testimony  of  Versions,  The  testimony  of  Fer- 
sions  is  to  be  estimated  by  their  antiquity,  and  by  the 
knowledge  of  the  Original  which  the  translator  pos- 
sessed. In  order  to  judge  of  the  latter,  the  Version  must 
be  compared  in  many  places  with  the  original,  in  passa- 
ges where  the  sense  is  certain.  But  here,  we  must  well 
understand  the  language  of  the  Version  itself,  lest  we 
should  err  in  judging  of  it,  and  rashly  suppose  the  Trans- 
lator has  not  hit  the  true  sense,  (which  has  often  hap- 
pened to  those  who  have  passed  sentence  on  the  Sept. 
Version,  and  on  the  quotations  from  the  Old  Test.,  that 
are  to  be  found  in  the  JSTew  ;)  or  lest  we  should  under- 
stand the  words  which  are  nicely  chosen,  in  a  low  and 
vulgar  sense.  Boyce  has  shewn,  that  even  Erasmus  and 
Beza  have  erred  here.  (Morus,  p.  130.  XXXV.) 

Here  again,  antiquity  is  to  be  regarded  only  as  conferring 
more  advantage  on  a  translator,  in  respect  to  a  knowledge  of 
ancient  customs,  history,  &c.  In  some  cases,  too,  the  translator 
may  have  lived  before  the  languaere  which  he  translates  had 
ceased  to  be  vernacular.  But  in  either  of  these  cases,  an  igno- 
rant man  could  not  be  recommended  as  a  translator,  because  he 
preceded,  by  one,  four,  or  ten  centuries,  an  intelligent,  thorough 
philologist.  The  credit  of  any  Version  turns  on  its  fidelity  and 
ability.  No  ancient  Version,  either  Sept.,  Vulgate,  Italic,  Syri- 
ac,  Chaldaic,  &c,  will  bear  any  comparison  in  respect  to  either 
of  these  characteristics,  with  many  recent  versions,  made  by  the 
finished  Oriental  scholars  of  the  present  day. 

§91.  Other  similar  testimonies.  Similar  to  the  helps 
just  mentioned,  are  those  writers,  who  have  explained 
to  their  readers,  words  and  obscure  expressions  taken 
from  another  language.  E.  g.  Cicero  explains  many 
Oreek  words,  and  Dionysius  Halicar.  many  Latin  ones. 


44  ©N  FINDING  THE  USlTS  LO^UENDI 

Of  the  same  class,  are  writers  who  have  inserted  trans- 
lations from  another  language ;  e.  g.  the  Latin  poets 
and  historians,  from  the  Greek  ;  the  writers  of  the  New 
Testament,  from  the  Hebrew  of  the  Old.  (Morus,  p. 
131.  XXXVI.) 

Passages  cited  from  the  Old  Testament,  are  frequently  ex- 
plained in  the  New,  either  by  the  connexion  in  which  tiiey  stand, 
the  language  in  which  they  are  expressed,  (Comp.  Is.  40:13  with 
Rom.  11:  34)  or  by  some  adjuncts  or  direct  explanation. 

§  92.  Knowledge  of  the  peculiar  style  and  all  the  civ 
cumstances  of  an  author  necessary.  The  principles  of  in- 
terpretation, thus  far,  apply  to  writers  of  all  ages  and 
nations.  But  in  addition  to  these,  there  are  some  prin- 
ciples peculiar  and  appropriate  to  certain  writers,  of 
a  particular  age,  nation,  or  sect.  This  peculiar  usus  lo- 
quendi  may  be  known,  (l)  From  the  writer's  own  testi- 
mony, either  express  or  implied.(a)  (2)  From  the  cus- 
toms and  principles  of  the  sect  to  which  he  belongs,  (6) 
whether  philosophical  or  religious  ;  and  these  customs 
and  principles  may  be  known,  from  the  testimony  of 
those  who  belonged  to  the  same  sect,  or  have  explained 
its  principles.  (3)  The  interpreter  must  have  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  age,  to  which 
his  author  alludes  ;  (c)  and  this  is  to  be  obtained  by  con- 
sulting those,  who  have  given  information  on  these  top- 
ics, {d)  (4)  The  interpreter  should  have  a  general 
knowledge  of  writers  of  the  same  age.  (Morus,  pp. 
132—141.) 

a)  If  an  author  have  a  manner  of  expression  wholly  suigeneriSf 
then  his  own  writings  are  the  only  legitimate  source  of  informa- 
tion in  respect  to  it ;  and  in  them,  testimony  may  be  either  di-_ 
rect,  where  the  author  himself  gives  explanations  ;  or  indirect, 
where  the  explanations  are  to  be  drawn  from  adjuncts,  or  the 
context.  (6)  Every  religious  sect  has  terms  used  in  a  sense  pe- 
culiar to  itself.  Of  course,  a  writer  belonging  to  this  sect  may  be 
supposed  to  use  its  language  ;  and  an  explanation  ofitislobe 
found,  as  Ernr  sti  directs,  (c)  F.very  age  has  its  own  peculiar 
language,  customs  and  sentiments,  in  some  respect  or  other. 
Consequently  a  knowledge  of  these  peculiarities  is  necessary,  in 
order  to  explain  language  that  is  predicated  upon  them.     Hence 


GENERALLY  IN  THE  DEAD  LANGUAGES.         45 

it  is  plain,  (rf)  That  cotemporary  authors  are  the  most  probable 
source  o/' illustration,  next  to  the  writings  of  an  author  himself; 
as  they  were  conversant  with  the  same  manners,  customs,  lan- 
guage, sentiments,  <StC,  as  the  author. 

The  question,  To  what  nation  did  the  author  belongs,  is  of 
great  moment,  oftentimes,  in  explainmg  his  niethod  of  using  lan- 
guage. E.  g.  What  can  be  more  diverse,  than  the  Jewish,  and 
Roman  and  Attic  method  of  writing,  in  a  great  variety  of  re- 
spects ? 

§  93.  The  nature  of  composition  should  be  specially 
reg-arded  in  the  interpretation  of  it  History  is  one 
thing;  poetij,  another;  oratory,  another,  (a)  Partic- 
ular periods  have  their  special  characteristics  in  each 
of  these  modes  of  composition;  which  frequently  arises 
from  a  fashion  of  writing-  or  speaking,  introduced  by 
some  distinguished  person.     (Morus,  p.  141 — 147.) 

History  therefore  is  to  be  interpreted  as  history,  not  as  alle- 
gory, or  mythic  fiction ;  poetry  is  to  be  construed  as  possessing 
its  own  peculiar  characteristics  ;  and  so  of  the  rest.  No  one 
circumstance  more  displays  an  interpreter's  knowledge  and  crit- 
ical acumen,  than  a  judicious  regard  to  the  kind  of  composition, 
and  the  age,  circumstances,  and  idiom  of  the  author. 


PART  II. 

CHAPTER  III. 

OTHER    MEANS  TO    ASSIST    IN  FINDING    THE    SENSE  OP  WORDS, 
BESIDES  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI. 

[Compare  Keil,  pp.  45—80.  Beck,  pp.  127—141.  Seiler,  H  250 
—256.] 

§  94.  Design  of  the  following  chapter.  The  preced- 
ing chapter  treated  of  the  method  of  finding  the  usus  la- 
quendi^  i.  e.  the  meaning  which  usage  has  attached  to 
words,  by  direct  testimony.      This  testimony,  it  was 


46  SUBSIDIARY  MEAN* 

shewn,  might  be  deduced  from  three  sources;  viz, 
from  the  author  interpreted,  or  his  cotemporaries ; 
from  foreigners  who  understood  his  language  ;  and  from 
Scholia,  Glossographies,  and  Versions.  With  these  was 
united  a  knowledge  of  the  peculiar  style,  idiom,  coun- 
try, circumstances,  &c,  of  the  author,  as  also  the  kind 
of  compositions,  which  is  to  be  interpreted.  We  come 
now  to  treat  of  indirect  testimony,  to  which  we  must 
frequently  resort,  in  order  to  iind  the  meaning  of  words. 

§  95.  JVecessity  of  indirect  testimony.  The  usus  lo- 
quendi  cannot  always  be  found,  with  sufficient  certainty, 
by  those  means  which  have  been  pointed  out.  Proper 
evidence  respecting  it  is  sometimes  wanting ;  some- 
times usage  is  variable  or  inconstant,  even  in  the  same 
age,  or  in  the  same  writer ;  or  there  is  an  ambiguity  of 
language,  or  of  grammatical  forms;  or  an  obscurity 
covers  the  subject  or  thing  treated  of;  or  novelty  of 
language  occurs ;  or  a  neglect  of  the  usus  loquendi^  which 
sometimes  happens  even  in  the  most  careful  writers. 
Other  means  therefore  must  be  used,  by  which  the  true 
sense  can  be  elicited.     (Morus,  p.  148.  I.) 

§  96.  Scope  of  a  writer  the  first  and  best  means.  The 
most  important  of  these  means  for  discovering  the  sense 
of  any  particular  passage,  is  found  in  resorting  to  the 
general  tenor  of  the  discourse.  The  design  or  scope  of 
the  discourse  in  general,  is  to  be  compared  with  the 
passage  investigated. (a)  The  ground  of  this  rule  is, 
that  we  ought  not  to  suppose  a  good  and  judicious  writ- 
er has  said  what  is  inconsistent  with  his  design.  Abso- 
lute certainty,  however,  is  not  always  attainable,  in  this 
way;  for  it  sometimes  happens,  that  several  interpre- 
tations may  agree  with  the  scope  of  the  writer.  Hence, 
there  are  cases  in  which  only  a  probability  in  favor  of 
a  certain  meaning  is  to  be  found  ;  and  even  cases,  where 
not  so  much  as  this  can  be  attained.  (Morus,  p.  149. 
III—V.) 

o)  But  how  is  this  scope  of  the  writer  to  be  ascertained  ?  (1) 
From  the  express  statement  of  the  M'riter,     E.  g.  John  20:31. 


OP  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI.  47 

Rom.  3;  28.  (2)  From  the  occasion  or  circumstances,  which 
originated  the  discourse.  E.  g.  the  parables  of  Christ,  and  many 
passages  in  the  Epistles.  (3)  From  history,  i.  e.  authentic  ac- 
counts of  facts,  that  would  very  naturally  give  rise  to  the  dis- 
course in  question,  and  would  serve  to  explain  it ;  e.  g.  the  epis- 
tle of  Jude  is  directed  against  teachers,  who  lived  licentiously. 
2  Cor.  almost  throughout,  has  reference  to  facts  which  existed  at 
that  time.  If  none  of  these  things  cast  sufficient  light  on  the 
scope  of  the  writer,  the  whole  must  be  perused  and  re-perused 
carefully  ;  by  which,  unexpected  light  often  breaks  in. 

But  some  caution,  in  respect  to  the  rule  in  Section  96  is  proper. 
All  parts  of  a  discourse  have  not,  invariably,  a  strict  connexion 
with  its  general  scope.  iVIany  things  are  often  said,  which  are 
wholly  irrelevant  to  it,  and  which  are  mere  obiter  dicta.  These 
are  not  to  be  interpreted  by  the  general  scope  of  the  discourse, 
but  agreeably  to  the  subject  thai  is  treated  of,  in  the  place  where 
they  occur.  Recurrence  to  this  principle  is  very  important,  in 
many  parts  of  the  New  Testament. 

§  97.  Caution  in  regard  to  the  rule  above.  In  regard 
to  this  means,  then,  of  attaining  the  sense,  we  must  take 
care  not  to  trust  too  much  to  it,  nor  to  rely  solely  upon 
it.  Nor  must  we  rest  satisfied  with  only  some  tolera- 
ble agreement  of  the  sense  given,  with  the  general 
scope  of  the  writer.  This  the  unlearned  are  v.ery  apt 
to  do,  for  want  of  skill  in  the  languages  ;  whence  have 
arisen  many  idle  conjectures.  We  must  insist  upon  an 
evident  and  necessary  connexion  with  the  scope  of  the 
discourse. 

But  how  shall  we  know  when  it  is  evident,  and  necessary^  (1) 
"Where  a  meaning  plainly  contradicts  the  tenor  of  a  discourse,  it 
is  to  be  rejected.  (2)  When  it  violates  the  principles  of  paral- 
lelism, and  the  conclusions  drawn  from  them,  as  to  the  sense  of 
a  passage.  (See  H  80 — 86.)  (3)  Reject  a  meaning,  which 
gives  an  inept  and  frigid  sense.  By  a  frigid  sense,  is  mf  ant  one 
which  contributes  neither  to  argument,  nor  perspicuity,  nor  or- 
nament. 

A  meaning  which  infringes  upon  none  of  these  negative  pre- 
cepts, will  be  found  to  harmonize  with  the  subject  of  which  the 
author  is  treating,  unless  he  has  violated  all  the  rules  of  language 
and  reasoning. 

§  98.  Second  caution^  in  regard  to  the  scope  of  the  dis- 
course.    Another  caution  is,  that  we  compare  the  mean- 


48  SUBSIDIARY  MEANS 

ing,  as  discovered  by  the  scope  of  the  writer,  with  that 
which  the  asus  loqucndi  affords,  and  see  whether  they 
can  be  niade  to  agree.  In  other  words,  we  must  see 
whether  the  usus  loquendi  will  tolerate  any  particular 
sense  given  to  the  passage  by  the  scope  of  the  dis- 
course, specially  in  respect  to  words  which  have  vari- 
ous meanings;  or  whether  there  be  a  repugnance  to  it. 
Occasionally,  the  meaning  derived  from  the  scope  of 
the  writer,  will  lead  to  a  knowledge  of  something 
which  may  serve  to  establish  its  harmony  with  the  usus 
loquendi. 

But  to  interpret  solely  from  the  supposed  scope  of  a 
writer,  without  the  aid  and  consent  of  the  usus  loquendi^ 
and  even  in  opposition  to  it,  belongs  rather  to  rash  con- 
jecture, than  to  interpretation  by  rule.  Wherefore  this 
help  is  not  to  be  used,  unless  in  cases  of  ambiguity,  or 
of  words  which  are  dna'S,  Ifyof-ievcc,  and  generally  in 
cases  where  the  best  testimony  to  the  meaning  of  words 
is  either  wanting,  or  is  insufficient  to  determine  the 
sense.(a)     (Morus,  p.  168.  VII.  and  VIII.) 

a)  The  reason  why  (he  scope  of  a  discourse  is  not  to  be  re- 
sorted to,  except  in  cases  where  anibiguity  arises,  is,  that  the 
usus  loquendi  is  the  best  evidence  which  can  be  liad  of  the  mean- 
ins:  of  a  passH^e,  and  nothing  can  be  admitted  which  shall  con- 
tradict it,  where  it  can  be  established  by  adequate  testimony. 
iBut  in  case  one  doubts  what  meaning  the  usus  loquendi  would 
assign,  or  at  least  allow,  to  any  word  or  phrase,  secondary  or 
subsidiary  means,  i.  e.  the  scope  of  the  discourse  may  be  resort- 
ed to,  for  the  sake  of  obtaining  the  desired  illustration. 

§  99.  Use  of  the  context  in  interpretation.  Of  more 
limited  extent,(a)  but  rather  more  evident,  is  the  rule, 
to  have  recourse  to  the  antecedents  and  consequents  of 
a  passage,  i.  e.  the  context,  in  order  that  you  may  de- 
termine its  meaning.  This  is  done  for  two  reasons  :  ei- 
ther that  we  may  choose  out  of  several  meanings,  one 
which  does  not  disagree  with  the  usus  loquendi  ;  or  that 
the  meaning  of  an  uncommon  word,  not  explained  by 
the  usus  loquendi^  may  be  discovered.  Here,  however, 
we  must  guard  against  proceeding  be}  ond  probability  ; 
and  to  do  this,  we  must  observe  the  same  cautions,  as 
have  been  just  given  above.     (IVIorus,  p.  160.  IX.) 


GF  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI.  49 

a)  In  the  original,  angustius ;  by  which  Ernesti  probably 
meant,  of  less  importance^  or  confined  within  narrower  limits. 
But  I  cannot  accede  to  the  propriety  of  this  sentinrient ;  for  the 
inamediate  context,  either  preceding,  succeeding,  or  both  togeth- 
er, is  a  rule  for  judging  of  the  meaning  of  words,  of  the  \eTy 
broadest  extent.  I  might  say  that  even  the  evidence  of  the  usus 
hjquendiy  is,  in  very  many  cases,  built  upon  iae  context.  We 
adopt  the  opinion,  that  the  usus  loquendi  sanctions  this  or  that 
particular  sense,  because  the  context  clearly  shews  that  such  a 
meaning  is  to  be  assigned  to  it,  and  that  no  other  can  be  given 
without  rendering  the  sense  frigid  and  inept.  Moreover,  the 
general  scope  of  an  author  does  not  forbid  the  admission  of  a 
great  variety  of  arguments,  illustrations,  and  episodes  (if  I  may 
be  indulged  in  the  use  of  such  a  word  here)  into  the  intermediate 
parts  of  a  discourse  ;  so  that  one  is  far  more  certain  of  giving 
a  sense  that  is  congruous,  by  consulting  the  immediate  contexty 
than  by  merely  consulting  the  general  scope  of  the  whole.  Both, 
no  doubt,  are  to  be  regarded ;  but  of  the  two,  the  former  is  by 
far  the  most  important  means  of  assistance. 

Indeed,  I  should  doubt  whether  there  is  any  one  rule,  in  the 
whole  science  of  Hermeneutics,  so  important,  and  of  so  much 
practical  and  actual  use,  as  the  one  in  question.  Great  care  in- 
deed, is  necessary,  to  decide  with  certainty  what  sense  the  con- 
text requires  that  a  word  should  have  ;  specially  when  the  im- 
mediate subject  is  briefly  stated.  But  this  carets  as  easily  prac- 
tised, as  any  other  rule  is,  which  Hermeneutics  prescribes  in  dif- 
ferent cases.  Violence  must  not  be  done  to  words,  by  forcibly 
subjecting  them  to  the  context,  against  etymology,  analogy,  the 
rules  of  grammar,  and  the  nature  of  language.  But  in  every 
thing  short  of  this,  all  good  Lexicographers  and  Commentators 
adapt  the  meaning  of  words  to  the  context,  in  cases  too  numerous 
to  need  any  specification.     Comp.  Morus  ut  supra. 

§  100.  Various  comparisons  useful.,  in  order  to  discov- 
er the  m.eaning  of  words.  Of  similar  utility  ibr  finding 
the  sense  of  ambiguous  or  obscure  words  is  the  compar- 
ing of  subject  and  attribute  ;  of  nouns  and  adjectives  ;  (a) 
of  words  accompanied  by  other  words  that  qualify  them, 
which  may  consist  of  adverbs,  or  of  nouns  joined  to  the 
word  investigated  by  prepositions  and  constituting  a 
kind  of  adverbial  periphrasis;  {b)  or  finally  of  disjunc- 
tives.(c)     (Morus,  p.  163.  XI— XIV.) 

^  a)Quah'a  sint  subject  a  ^  ialia  sint  attributa,  is  the  old  rule  of 
the  Schools  and  of  philosophy,  founded  upon  the  common  sense 
of  mankind.     In  accordance  with  this,  we  understand  as  tropica! 


->0  SUBSIDIARY  MEANS 

language,  all  those  expressions  which  ascribe  hands,  feet,  eyes, 
ascent,  descent,  &:c,  to  God,  who  is  a  Spirit.  The  principle  in 
question  is  of  vast  extent  in  construing  the  figurative  language  of 
the  Scriptures  ;  and  it  also  extends  to  manj  expressions  that  are 
not  strictly  tropical.  Too  much  certainty  however,  should  not 
be  ascribed  to  it ;  for  some  cases  occur,  where  the  subject  is  im- 
perfectly known,  and  of  course,  we  are  unable  to  pronounce,  with 
confidence,  what  attributes  may  be  ascribed  to  it. 

b)  E  g.  ^ar  oxpcv  agcGcg'  Kax  o\pcv  serves  merely  the 
purpose  of  an  adjective,  qualifying  agiGl^Q^  and  shewing  that 
judgment  from   external  appearance  only  is  meant. 

b)  By  disjunctives  are  meant,  words  placed  in  antithesis.  E.g. 
Heaven,  earth  ;  spirit,  Jiesh;  &c.  The  rule  for  finding  the  sense, 
in  such  cases,  is  obvious,  provided  the  meaning  of  either  term 
can  be  found.  For  whatever  meaning  one  term  has,  the  other  has 
the  opposite ;  so  that  if  certainty  be  acquired  as  to  the  one,  it  is 
of  course  acquired  as  to  the  other,  which  is  to  be  construed  as  a 
real  antithesis.     Compare  ^  62. 

§  101.  Analogy  of  languages  a  means  of  interpreta- 
iion.  Analogy  of  languages  may  also  assist,  in  judging" 
of  the  meaning  of  words.  This  is  of  different  kinds. 
The  first  is  analogy  of  any  particular  language,  (i.  e.  the 
same  language  with  that  to  be  interpreted,  which  anal- 
ogy was  treated  of  in  a  former  chapter,  and  shewn  to 
be  useful  in  ascertaining  the  usus  loquendi,)  the  princi- 
ples of  which  are  developed  by  the  precepts  of  gram- 
marians. It  is  necessary  here  only  to  touch  upon  this 
analogy.     (Morus,  p.  168.  XV.) 

Analogy  means  similitude.  E.  g.  From  the  meaning  attach- 
ed to  the  forms  of  words,  their  position,  their  connexion,  &c,  in 
one  or  rather  many  cases,  we  argue  to  establish  a  similarity  of 
meaning,  where  the  phenomena  are  the  same,  in  another.  This 
analogy  is  the  foundation  of  all  the  rules  of  Grammar,  and  of  all 
that  is  established  and  intelligible  in  language. 

§  102.  Grammatical  analogy  useful  not  only  in  finding 
the  usus  loquendi^  but  applicable  to  some  doubtful  cases. 
E.  g.  when  the  kind  of  meaning  generally  considered, 
is  evident,  (by  comparing  other  similar  words,  and  me- 
thods of  speaking  concerning  such  things,  appropriate 
to  the  language,)  we  may  judge  of  the  special  force  or 
power  of  the  word,  by  aid  of  grammatical  analogy  :  as, 


OF  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI.  51 

1  Pet.  Y.  5,  where  many  critics  have  attached  to  eyy^Ofx- 
6(aaa(56uv  an  emphatic  sense,  we  must  compare  the  oth- 
er Greek  phrases,  which  relate  to  clothings  or  investing. 
And  thus  we  shall  see,  that  the  prepositions,  neQi,  af,iqt, 
ev  are  used  in  composition,  without  any  accession  of 
meaning  to  the  verb  thereby ;  and  consequently  that 
fyao^SojoaGdac  is  no  more  than  evdvoccoOac^  with  which 
it  is  commuted,  in  Clemens  Rom.  Ep.  I.  p.  39.  A  good 
interpreter  should  be  well  versed  in  such  comparisons. 
(Morus,  p.  170.  XVI.) 

§103.  Analogy  of  kindred  languages.  Another  ctwai- 
ogy  is  that  of  kindred'  languages  ;  either  as  descended 
from  one  common  stock,  as  Hebrew,  Syriac,  Chaldee 
and  Arabic ;  or  derived  the  one  from  the  other,  as  Latin 
and  Greek.  The  former  kind  of  analogy  Schultens  has 
explained,  and  often  had  recourse  to  it,  in  his  Origines 
Ling,  Heb.^  and  in  his  various  Commentaries. 

Morus,  on  this  section,  sajs,  thai  dialects  differ  only  in  the  mode 
of  declining,  in  the  pronunciation  and  forms  of  words,  &c  ;  and 
ranks  the  Syriac,  Chaldee,  and  Arabic,  among  the  dialects  of  the 
Hebrew  ;  while  he  calls  the  Latin  and  Greek,  cognate  languages. 
General  usage,  however,  is  against  him  ;  for  cognate  languages 
of  the  Hebrew  is  almost  the  appropriate  name  of  those  which  he 
calls  dialects. 

§  101.  Use  of  this  analogy.  This  analogy  is  of  use 
to  the  interpreter,  not  only  in  assisting  him  by  the  aid 
of  one  dialect,  to  restore  roots  which  have  perished  in 
another  that  is  the  subject  of  his  investigation,  and  thus 
opening  a  way  of  access  to  the  signification  of  words; 
but  still  more  useful  as  a  means  of  illustrating  and  con- 
firining  that  sense  of  words,  which  the  scope  of  the  dis- 
course commends. 

This  is  a  subject  deeply  interesting  to  every  student  of  the 
original  languages  of  the  Bible,  especially  of  the  Hebrew. 
Analogy,  moderately  and  judiciously  used,  is  of  great  worth  ; 
but  pushed  too  far,  it  degenerates  into  a  violation  of  all  the  fun- 
damental rules  of  Interpretation.  Comp.  Morus,  p.  176.  XIX — 
XXII,  where  several  valuable  cautions  may  be  found.  Better 
still  may  be  found  in  the  admirable  Preface  of  Gesenius  to  hie 


5^  SUBSIDIARY  MEANS 

Hebrew  Lexicon,  Preface  to  Part  I.  pp.  4 — 6.  Part  II.  4 — 14. 
See  also  Jahn  on  the  study  of  the  original  languages  of  the  Scrip- 
tures, pp.  19,  20,  and  Note  G. 

§105.  Etymology  an  uncertain  guide.  The  fluctuat- 
ing use  of  words,  which  prevails  in  every  language, 
gives  rise  to  frequent  changes  in  their  meaning.  There 
are  but  few  words  in  any  language,  which  always  re- 
tain their  radical  and  primary  meaning.  Great  care, 
therefore,  is  necessary  in  the  interpreter,  to  guard 
against  rash  etymological  exegesis  ;  which  is  often  very 
fallacious.  Etymology  often  belongs  rather  to  the  his- 
tory of  language,  than  to  the  illustration  of  its  present 
meaning ;  and  rarely  does  it  exhibit  any  thing  more 
than  a  specious  illustration. 

See  an  admirable  illustration  of  this,  in  Canapb.  IV.  H  15 — 26. 

§  108.  Expressions  which  convey  a  similar  meaning  are 
to  be  compared^  although  in  respect  to  etymology  they  may 
differ.  That  analogy  is  particularly  useful  to  an  inter- 
preter, which  leads  him  not  only  to  compare  similar 
words  and  phrases,  and  so  cast  light  from  the  one  upon 
the  other;  but  also  to  compare  expressions,  which 
though  dissimilar  in  respect  to  etymology^  are  employed 
to  designate  the  same  idea.  Of  this  nature  are  TcenQafxa' 
vog  V7T0  Tf]p  dfAaQTiuv  compared  with  the  Latin  addictus 
alicui^  and  ojg  dta  7n;()0^  compared  with  amhustus  ;  when 
the  Latin  words  are  used  tropically.  So  we  may  com- 
pare the  Hebrew  l3']b^'n  "JS^  with  the  Greek  enTiodcov. 
For  as  the  Greeks  clearly  use  ennodajv  where  the  Lat- 
ins say,  e  medio  ;  so  iTtnodcov  and  D'^blJ'^  'jS^  are  so 
much  alike,  that  the  Greek  would  almost  seem  to  be 
made  out  of  the  Hebrew  phrase.  Hence  we  may  see 
that  the  sense  of  fi'^b^^  )7iJ2  is  c  medio.  (Morus,  p.  180. 
XXI.) 

§  107.  Foundation  of  analogy  in  all  languages.  No 
one  can  doubt  that  men  are  affected  in  nearly  the  same 
way,  by  objects  of  serise.  Hence,  those  who  speak  of 
the  same   objects,  perceived  and  contemplated  in  the 


OF  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI.  53 

same  manner,  although  they  may  use  language  that  dif- 
fers in  respect  to  etymology,  yet  must  be  supposed  to 
have  meant  the  same  thing;  and  on  this  account,  the 
one  maybe  explained  by  the  other.  (Morus,  p.  178. 
XX.) 

Men  are  physically  and  mentally  affected  in  the  same  manner, 
by  very  many  objects ;  and  of  course,  it  may  be  presumed  that 
they  entertain  and  mean  to  express  the  same  ideas  concerning 
these  objects,  however  various  their  language  may  be.  Besides, 
modes  of  expression  are  often  communicated  from  one  people 
to  another.  Of  the  use  to  be  made  of  these  facts,  the  following 
Section  treats. 

§  108.  Use  of  the  above  general  principle.  In  general, 
this  principle  is  of  great  extent,  and  of  much  use  to  the 
interpreter,  in  judging  of  the  meaning  of  tropical  lan- 
guage, and  in  avoiding  fictitious  emphasis.  According- 
ly, we  find  it  resorted  to,  now  and  then,  by  good  inter- 
preters, with  great  profit.  But  it  needs  much  and  ac- 
curate knowledge  of  many  tongues  to  use  it  discreetly  ; 
whence  it  is  not  to  be  wondered  at,  that  its  use  is  not 
very  common  among  interpreters.  (Morus,  p.  181. 
XXII.) 

The  following  general  cautions,  on  the  subject  of  comparing 
words  and  languages  with  each  other,  may  be  of  some  utility, 
(1)  The  meaning  in  each  or  any  language  is  not  to  be  resolved 
into  the  authority  of  Lexicons,  but  that  of  good  writers.  (2) 
Words,  phrases,  tropes,  &c,  of  any  ancient  language  are  to  be 
judged  of  by  the  rules  of  judging  among  those  who  spoke  that 
language,  and  not  by  those  which  prevail  in  modern  times,  and 
have  originated  from  different  habits  and  tastes.  (3)  Guard 
against  drawing  conclusions  as  to  the  meaning  of  words,  in  the 
same  or  different  languages,  from  fanciful  etymology,  similarity 
or  metathesis  of  letters,  &c.  (4)  "When  the  sense  of  words  can 
be  ascertained  in  any  particular  language,  by  the  ordinary  means, 
other  languages,  even  kindred  ones,  should  not  be  resorted  to;  ex- 
cept for  the  purpose  of  increased  illustration  or  confirmation. 
(5)  Take  good  care,  that  real  similitude  exists,  whenever  com- 
parison is  made.     See  Morus,  pp.  182 — 184. 

§  109.  Interpretation  by  appeal  to  the  nature  of  things^ 
the  common  sense^  views ^  and  feelings  of  men^  &c.     We 
*5 


^*i  SUBSIDIARY  MEANS 

must  also  resort  to  the  nature  of  things,  and  the  analo- 
gy of  the  sentiment,  which  a  writer  is  inculcating,  that 
^ve  may  find  the  true  meaning  of  his  words,  and  not  at- 
tribute to  them  more  nor  less  than  he  did.  Every  wri- 
ter, spontaneously  or  from  education,  feels  that  his  read- 
ers must  understand  what  he  is  saying,  so  that  there  is 
no  danger  of  misapprehension.  It  happens,  not  unfre- 
quently,  that  on  this  accoui-t  he  uses  language  which  is 
not  altogether  accurate,  if  it  be  judged  of  by  the  rules 
of  logical  precision.  Of  this  nature  are  catachresis,  hy- 
perbole^  hypallage^  and  those  phrases  which  assert  gen- 
erally what  is  true  of  only  a  part,  or  of  some  particular 
kind.  These  and  other  like  modes  of  speech  are  in- 
troduced by  vulgar  custom  into  every  language,  spe- 
cially into  the  Oriental  ones.  They  abound  in  poetry 
and  oratory.  Nor  is  there  any  particular  reason,  that 
a  writer  should  take  special  pains  to  avoid  them.  It  is 
necessary,  therefore,  in  these  cases,  to  have  recourse, 
for  the  sake  of  interpretation,  to  the  nature  of  things, 
(a)  to  innate  conceptions,  common  sense,  and  the  plain 
elements  of  knowledge,  {b)  Moreover,  we  must  avoid 
urging  mere  verbal  criticism  too  far,  or  introducing  far 
fetched  etymologies,  or  hastily  concluding  that  the  ex- 
pression of  the  author  is  faulty.  Language  is  made  by 
prevailing  usage  ;  nor  can  that  be  faulty  language,  which 
agrees  with  the  usage  of  those  who  are  well  skilled  in 
it.  Wherefore  grammatical  anomalies  are  not  only  free 
from  fault,  when  predominant  usage  sanctions  them,  but 
they  become  a  part  of  the  language,  so  that  one  who 
departs  from  them  may  be  said  to  write  inaccurately. 

a)  E.  g.  The  mind  is  injlamed ;  in  interpreting  which  expres- 
sion, we  resort  to  the  nature  of  the  mind,  to  show  that  the  sense 
of  inflamedmxi^i  he  tropical.  So  when  the  sun  is  said  to  rise^  go 
down^  &c  ;  God  to  ascend,  descend,  &c,  we  resort  to  the  real  na- 
ture of  the  subjects  in  question,  in  order  to  explain  the  language. 
So  in  explaining  prophetic  language,  if  the  event  prophesied  have 
come  to  pass,  we  resort  to  the  history  of  the  event,  to  cast  ligiit 
on  the  language  which  predicts  it. 

b)  E.  g.  Pluck  out  thy  right  eye;  cut  off  thy  right  hand.  In 
construing  this,  our  views  of  the  worth  of  life,  and  of  our  mem- 
bers ;  our  views  of  duty  as  to  the  preservation  of  life  and  use- 


Ol>  FINDING  THE  USUS  I.OqL'F.NDI.  5i) 

fulness,  and  our  knowledge  of  the  nature  of  the  Christian  relig- 
ion in  general,  all  conspire  to  lead  us  to  reject  the  literal  expo- 
aition,  and  to  give  the  words  a  tropical  sense.  So  when  Christ 
tells  his  disciples  to  salute  no  one  by  the  way^  Sec  ;  and  in  like 
manner,  in  innumerable  other  cases. 

As  to  the  various  figures  of  speech,  mentioned  in  the  section 
above,  can  it  be  doubted,  whether  they  occur  in  the  Scriptures? 
Catachresis  is  the  use  of  a  word,  so  as  to  attribute  to  a  thing,  what 
cannot  be  really  and  actually  predicated  of  it.  When  the  heav- 
ens then  are  said  to  listen ;  the  floods  to  clap  their  hands ;  the 
hills  to  skip  ;  the  trees  of  the  forest  to  exult  ;  what  is  this  but  ca- 
tachresis of  the  boldest  kind  ?  Hyperbole  magnifies  a  thing  be- 
yond its  real  greatness.  When  the  Saviour  says.  It  is  easier  for 
a  camel  to  go  through  the  eye  of  a  needle^  than  for  a  rich  man  to 
enter  into  the  Kingdom  of  God;  which  is  afterwards  explained 
as  merely  meaning,  How  hardly  shall  they  that  have  riches,  be 
saved  ;  was  not  his  language  hyperbole  ?  Hypallage  means  a 
change  of  appropriate  language  for  other  terms  unappropriate. 
E.g.  Luke  1:64,  his  mouth  and  his  toiigue  ^v£C0)^6f].  The 
student,  however,  must  not  be  content  with  a  meagre  note,  on 
this  great  subject.  Let  him  peruse  and  re-peruse  Lowth's  Lec- 
tures on  Hebrew  poetry,  where  the  nature,  design  and  extent  of 
figurative  language  in  the  Scriptures,  is  better  unfolded,  than  in 
any  other  book,  of  which  I  have  any  knowledge.  Comp.  also 
Glassii  Fhilol.  Sac.  ed.  Dathii,  Vol.  II.    (Morus,  pp.  185—194.) 

In  regard  to  that  usage,  by  which  the  whole  is  put  for  a  part, 
and  a  part  for  the  whole  ;  it  is  by  no  means  uufrequent  in  the 
Scriptures.  How  often  do  we  meet  with  nccQ  or  navreg,  when 
only  a  large  or  considerable  number  is  intended.  On  the  other 
hand,  a  part  is  put  as  the  representative  of  the  whole,  in  very 
many  passages  ;  e.  g.  Ps.  8:  7,  8.  Rom.  8:  38,  39.  Surely  in 
the  last  example  here,  the  apostle  does  not  mean  to  say  that  the 
things  which  he  particularizes,  are  the  only  things  which  are  un- 
able to  separate  us  from  the  love  of  Christ.  He  means  to  say, 
that  nothing  whatever  can  efifect  a  separation.  In  all  such  cases, 
the  extent,  the  nature  of  the  subject,  and  scope  of  the  discourse, 
must  determine  the  latitude  in  which  the  words  are  to  be  taken. 

Especially  must  common  sense^  as  Ernesti  says,  be  appealed  to 
in  the  interpretation  of  parables,  allegories,  and  all  kinds  of  fig- 
urative language,  proverbial  expressions,  &.c.  Every  writer  ad- 
dresses himself  to  the  common  sense  of  his  fellow  men. 

§  110.  The  error  of  pressing  etymologies  too  far  not 
unfrequent.  The  fault  of  pressing  etymologies  too  far, 
is  more  general  than  we  should  be,  apt  to  imagine.  For 
not  only  they  are  guilty  of  this  fault,  who  explain  all  , 


56  ON  FINDING  THE  USUS  lOQUENDI 

words  by  tracing  them  to  their  primitive  meaning, 
(which  is  very  common ;)  but  those  also,  who  always 
insist  too  strenuously  on  the  ordinary  and  grammatical 
Force  of  a  word.  Hence  arise  many  false  interpreta- 
tions and  fictitious  emphases.  But  of  this,  more  here- 
after. 


PART    II. 

CHAPTER    IV. 

ON  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI  OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT. 

[Keil,  pp.  46—60.     Beck,  pp.  131—136.     Seiler,  H  236—257.] 

§  111.  What  has  been  said  thus  far  in  this  Treatise, 
has  respect  to  the  laws  of  Interpretation  generally  con- 
sidered. We  come  now  to  treat  of  our  subject,  with 
reference  to  the  exegesis  of  the  JN'ew  Testament. 

§  112.  Knowledge  of  the  JV.  Testament  dialect  impor- 
tant. In  the  first  place,  we  must  inquire  concerning  the 
kind  of  language,  or  dialect  in  general,  which  the  writ- 
ers of  the  N.  Testament  use  ;  for  a  knowledge  of  this 
is  highly  important,  in  order  that  we  may  be  able  to 
find  and  judge  of  the  sense  of  the  words ;  as  will  speedi- 
ly be  shewn. 

§  1 1 3.  The  question  to  be  here  investigated.  This  sub- 
ject in  general  is  comprised  in  a  single  question  ;  viz. 
Is  the  N.  Testament,  in  its  words,  phrases,  and  form  of 
language,  pure  (a)  classic  Greek ;  or  does  it  partake  of 
the  Hebrew  idiom  ? 

The  former  is  defended  by  Pfochen,  Stolberg,  E. 
Schmidt,  Blackwall,  Georgi,  and  a  few  others,  not 
very  eminent  for  their  knowledge  of  Greek  ;  the  lat- 
ter, by  Erasmus,  Luther,  Melancthon,  Camerarius,  Beza, 


OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT.  57 

Drusius,  Casaubon,  Glass,  Gataker,  Solan,  Olearius, 
V^orstius,  and  many  others  who  were  well  skilled  in  the 
Greek  language  ;  with  whom  also,  Origen  and  Chrys- 
ostom  agree.  (Morus,  p.  195.  11.  Vide  etiampp.  217— 
222.) 

a)  We  call  that  a  pure  style,  which  has  neither  barbarisms  nor 
solecisms  in  it. 

§  1 14.  What  belongs  not  to  the  present  question.  If  this 
question  may  be  rightly  understood  and  judged  of,  we 
must  premise,  that  the  inquiry  is  not,  whether  some 
have  not  mistaken  or  do  not  still,  mistake,  pure  Greek 
expressions  for  Hebraisms.  We  may  readily  concede 
this;  for  error  may  bo,  and  has  been  committed  here; 
and  there  are  some  modes  of  speech,  which  are  com- 
mon to  all  languages.     (Morus,  p.  201.  IV.  I.) 

§  115.  Still  further  defined.  Nor  is  the  question, 
whether  the  same  Greek  words  and  phrases^  occurring 
in  the  N.  Testament,  may  be  found  in  good  Greek  au- 
thors. This  we  may  often  concede.  Nor  do  we  in- 
quire whether  some  phrase,  apparently  a  Hebraism, 
may  be  found  in  some  sublime  or  tragic  poet,  e.  g.  in 
Eschylus  or  Sophocles,  and  used  in  the  same  sense ;  as 
^tjQu  for  the  main  land.  For  poets,  specially  these  and 
Lyric  ones,  say  many  things  in  an  unusual  way,  which 
are  not  to  be  imitated  in  common  usage.  They  even 
intermix  foreign  expressions;  and  sometimes  use  anti- 
quated phrases.  IVIany  such  things  Stanley  has  noted 
in  Eschylus,  and  Zwingle  in  Pindar,  whose  preface  to 
fhis  author  should  be  read.  The  same  is  the  case  in 
Sophocles.     (Morus,  pp.    203—209.) 

§116.  The  same  subject  continued.  Nor  is  it  incon- 
sistent with  the  purity  of  N.  Testament  Greek,  that 
certain  words  are  found,  which  designate  objects  un- 
known to  the  Greeks,  and  are  therefore  to  be  under- 
stood in  a  manner  different  from  Greek  usage,  because 
they  borrow  their  meaning  from  the  Hebrew  manner  of 
speaking.  Of  this  kind  are  ncaiig^  fUTupoia^  and  other 
words.     (Morus,  p.  209.  IV.) 


68  OP  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI 

§  117.  The  question  directly  stated.  The  question,  as 
to  the  idiom  of  the  N.  Testament,  turns  on  the  use  of 
those  words  and  phrases,  which  designate  those  objects 
that  the  Greeks  are  accustomed  to  designate  ;  and  the 
inquiry  here  must  be,  whether  such  words  in  the  N. 
Testament  are  used  in  the  same  sense  which  the  Greeks 
attach  to  them  ;  and  whether  phrases  not  only  have  the 
same  syntax  as  that  of  classic  Greek,  but  also  the  same 
sense  as  in  the  Greek  authors  :  for  this  is  essential  to 
the  purity  of  language.  E.  g.  diaaioovvr]  used  for  liber- 
ality ;  £vXoyia  ior  plenty  ;  "Aotvov  ior  profane.  So  also, 
dc^aiog  evmniov  rov  Geov,  agrov  qayetv,  na^aOT7]vcct 
svoiTiLOv  Tii/og^  &c,  have  a  peculiar  sense,  in  the  JNT. 
Testament.     Morus,  pp.  196.  197.) 

§  1  18.  With  what  kind  of  Greek  is  the  JV.  Testament  to 
be  compared  ?  In  regard  to  the  writers  with  whom  the  N. 
Testament  Greek  is  to  be  compared  ;  we  must  see  that 
they  themselves  are  pure,  i.  e.  ancient,  prosaic  authors, 
who  have  not  derived  any  thing  in  their  style  from  the 
Scriptures  or  the  N.  Testament ;  and  then  historical 
writers  must  be  compared  with  historical ;  doctrinal 
with  doctrinal;  poetical  with  poetical,  (a)  (Morus,  pp. 
208.  209.) 

a)  Several  hymns  in  the  New  Testament,  and  the  Apocalypse, 
with  occasional  quotations  from  the  poetry  of  the  Old  Testament, 
are  poetical  in  their  nature^  though  not  in  their  form  ;  at  least, 
they  are  not  in  the  form  of  Greek  poetry. 

§  119.  JVew  Testament  Greek  not  pure.  The  ques- 
tion being  thus  stated  and  defined,  we  deny,  without 
hesitation,  that  the  diction  of  the  New  Testament  is 
pure  Greek;  and  contend  that  it  is  modeled  after  the 
Hebrew,  not  only  in  single  words,  phrases,  and  figures 
of  speech,  but  in  the  general  texture  of  the  language. 
This  can  be  established  by  clear  examples,  more  nu- 
merous than  even  those  who  agree  with  us  in  opinion 
have  supposed.  For  Luke  himself,  who  is  usually 
thought  to  be  the  most  pure  in  his  style,  has  innumera- 
ble Hebraisms.  The  very  beginning  of  his  Gospel,  af- 
ter a  short  preface  of  pure  Greek,  immediately  goes 


©F  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT.  59 

into  the  use  of  the  Hebrew  idiom  so  exactly,  that  it 
seems  to  be  translated  literally  from  a  Hebrew  original. 

§  120.  Some  phrases  are  common  to  Greek  and  He- 
hrczv.  To  prove  that  Hebrew-Greek  is  the  language 
of  the  New  Testament,  by  citing  examples  here,  would 
be  superfluous ;  as  these  may  be  found  in  abundance, 
by  consulting  the  works  of  Olearius,  Vorstius,  Leusden, 
Glass,  and  others.  It  may  be  proper  however  to  re- 
mark, that  although  certain  phrases  may  be  found  in 
pure  Greek,  yet  they  may  also  be  Hebraisms.  For 
it  may  happen,  that  a  writer,  in  translating  a  Hebrew 
expression,  may  adopt  words  used  by  a  good  Greek 
writer ;  which  is  an  observation  sanctioned  by  the  au- 
thority of  Gataker,  Hemsterhuis,  Raphel,  and  others. 
E.  g.  yaiQav  yatQeiv^  rnetum  metuere^  which  are  good 
Greek  and  Latin,  but  also  literal  translations  of  the  He- 
brew ^tiD  ins. 

§  121.  Arguments  to  support  the  sentiment  expressed  in 
§  1 19.  It  is  no  small  argument  for  the  Hebraistic  style 
of  the  New  Testament,  that  many  parts  of  it  can  be 
more  easily  translated  into  Hebrew,  than  into  any  other 
language,  as  Erasmus  Schmidius  confesses,  though  a 
strenuous  defender  of  the  classic  purity  of  the  New 
Testament.  Nay,  many  parts  of  the  New  Testament 
can  be  explained  in  no  other  way,  than  by  means  of  the 
Hebrew.  Moreover,  in  many  passages,  there  would 
arise  an  absurd  or  ridiculous  meaning,  if  they  should  be 
interpreted  according  to  a  pure  Greek  idiom  ;  as  ap- 
pears from  the  examples  produced  by  Werenfels,  and 
by  me,  in  my  Essay  De  difficidtt,  interpr.  gromm.  A''. 
Test,  §  12;  to  which  many  others  might  easily  be  add- 
ed. Theology  would  have  been  freed  from  many  er- 
rors, that  have  crept  in,  if  Hebraisms  had  not  been  in- 
terpreted as  pure  Greek ;  as  Melancthon  in  his  Com- 
mentaries has  frequently  shewn.     (Morus,  p.  198.  III.) 

122,  Additional  argument.     It  is  another  argument  in 


60  ©F  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDI  < 

favor  of  the  Hebraisms  of  the  New  Testament,  that 
former  Greek  and  Latin  interpreters,  who  have  follow- 
ed the  manner  of  classic  Greek,  in  their  interpretations, 
have  often  tortured  the  sense,  and  made  it  plainly  in- 
ept. E.  g.  in  explaining  GvpdeofAco  TilHOTt]Tog,  as  Me- 
Jancthon  remarks.  The  same  thing  has  happened  to 
modern  interpreters,  who  are  ignorant  of  the  Hebrew 
idiom  ;  while,  to  those  who  are  acquainted  with  it,  such 
passages  are  very  plain.  But  mistakes,  on  such  ground, 
could  not  be  made,  if  the  Apostles  had  written  pure 
Greek.     (Morus,  p.  199.) 

§  123.  Objections  answered.  We  need  not  be  under 
any  apprehension,  that  the  dignity  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment will  suffer,  by  the  admission  that  Hebraisms  may 
be  found  in  its  style.  Tr?/^/i  cannot  injure  religion  ;  and 
many  reasons,  moreover,  may  be  given,  why  the  He- 
brew-Greek style  was  proper  and  necessary  for  the 
New  Testament  writers. 

For  1,  The  writers  of  the  New  Testament  could  not 
spontaneously  write  Greek  well,  ina-smuch  as  they  were 
born  and  educated  Hebrews ;  nor  did  they  learn  Greek 
in  a  scholastic  way,  nor  were  they  accustomed  to  the 
reading  of  Greek  authors.  This  is  true  of  Paul  as  well 
as  the  others.  For  although  he  was  born  at  Tarsus, 
where  schools  of  rhetoric  and  philosophy  were  estab- 
lished, it  does  not  follow  that  he  attended  them;  nor 
that  he  was  familiar  with  the  Greek  poets,  because  he 
quotes  a  single  verse  from  one  of  them.  Greek  taste, 
style,  and  literature  were  plainly  foreign  to  a  man,  who 
belonged  to  the  most  rigid  of  the  sect  of  the  Pharisees, 
and  was  brought  up  at  the  feet  of  Gamaliel. 

2.  Nor  was  it  congruous,  that  the  Holy  Spirit  should 
inspire  the  Apostles  to  write  pure  Greek.  For  pass- 
ing by  the  consideration,  that  if  they  had  written  classic 
Greek,  no  critic  would  now  admit  that  they  were  the 
authors  of  the  books  ascribed  to  them,  we  may  say  that 
the  Apostles  themselves  would  not  have  understood 
their  own  language,  unless  by  additional  inspiration  giv- 


OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT.  .         ^1 

en  for  this  very  purpose.  Much  less  would  the  com- 
mon peo[>le  among  the  Jews  have  understood  it ;  for 
whom  these  books,  for  the  most  part,  w^ere  primarily 
written;  and  who,  through  hatred  of  the  Greeks  and 
of  Grecian  eloquence,  would  not  have  approved  of  a 
classic  style,  it  being  so  contrary  to  the  diction  of  the 
Septuagint,  and  so  diverse  from  the  Hebrew  Scrip- 
tures. 

Finally^  as  the  New  Testament  is  built  upon  the  old, 
the  same  diction  ought  to  be  preserved  throughout. 
(Morus,  pp.  210—217.) 

§  124.  Hehrcw-Greek  idiom  does  not  necessarily  make 
the  style  of  the  JVew  Testament  obscure.  Nor  does  the 
Hebrew  idiom  of  the  New  Testament  injure  its  perspi- 
cuity. Every  writer  has  special  reference  to  his  own 
times  ;  to  those  for  whom  he  primarily  writes  ;  not  to 
future  times,  so  as  to  neglect  his  cotemporaries.  The 
obscurity  which  arises  ft:om  this  mode  of  writing  is  not 
a  necessary  one  ;  but  results  merely  from  the  change 
which  time  makes  in  languages.  It  is  an  obscurity 
common  to  all  good  ancient  writers ;  for  the  ground  of 
it  lies  in  the  ignorance  of  later  readers,  and  not  in  the 
writers. 

§  125.  Language  of  the  Kew  Testament  is  Hebrew^ 
Greek.  Hence  the  style  of  the  New  Testament  may 
justly  be  named,  Hebrew-Greek,  if  any,  with  Scaliger  and 
Drusius,  Choose  to  call  it  Hellenistic^  let  them  not,  with 
Heinsius,  understand  by  this  a  peculiar^Z)ia/ec( ;  which  ^^^ 
Salmasius  has  sufficiently  refuted.  Nor  would  I  name 
it  the  Alexa?idrine  Dialect ;  for  the  Jews,  in  other 
places,  wrote  in  the  same  style.  The  Alexandrine  dia- 
lect, concerning  which  there  is  extant  a  little  book  of 
one  Irenaeus  an  Alexandrine  grammarian,  respects 
merely  peculiarities  of  language  appropriate  to  the  Al- 
exandrians ;  such  for  example,  as  existed  among  the 
Attics,  lonians,  &c.  Some  choose  to  call  it  the  Mace- 
donian dialect,  becauj^e  many  words  in  the  New  Testa- 
6 


/ 


62  OF  FINDING  THE   USUS  LOQUENDi 

ment  are  peculiar  to  the  Macedonians,  and  the  language 
agrees  more  with  that  of  Polybius,  Diodorus  Siculu5<, 
&c,  than  with  that  of  the  ancient  Greek  writers.  (Mo- 
rus,  pp.  222—234.) 

§  126.  It  also  comprizes  Latinlsms.  Nor  is  all,  which 
is  not  pure  Greek,  of  course  to  be  named  Hebraism  ; 
for  some  words  are  of  Latin  derivation,  occasioned  by 
intercourse  with  the  Romans  ;  and  others  are  of  the 
Syriac,  Chaldee,  or  Rabbinic  dialect.  Vide  Olearius 
de  Stylo  Nov.  Test.  Sect,  didac.  ii.  iii ;  et  Wetsteni- 
um  ad  N.  Test.  Acta.  13.  48.     (Morus,  pp.  235.-238.) 

Besides  Fiatinisms,  as  (Sne^OvXaxMQ  zovGreodia,  and  such 
phrases  as  XajLi^ai^eiv  OV^^OvXcov  consilium  capere^  e^yaocvcv 
dovi/av  operam  dare,  &c,  there  are  Persian  words  to  be  Ibund  in 
the  New  Testament,  as  Aa^a^,  fiayov,  ayyaQevetv.  Sjriasms, 
as  A^^a.  MaQav  ylda.  Also  Chaldaisms  and  llabbinisms. 
See  Marsh's  Michaelis,  on  the  New  Testannent  idioms. 

§  127.  Method  of  finding  the  usus  loquendi  of  the  A''ew 
Testament  not  difficult.  These  things  being  settled  re- 
specting the  general  nature  of  the  New  Testament 
diction;  it  will  be  easy  to  point  out  the  method  of 
ascertaining  the  usus  loquendi,  and  of  drawing  aid 
from  it,  in  the  interpretation  of  particular  passages',  so 
as  to  assist  the  interpreter. 

§  128,  Rules  for  finding  the  usus  loquendi.  First ^  the 
interpreter  should  be  well  skilled  in  the  Greek  and 
Hebrew  idioms ;  so  that  he  can  distinguish  between 
pure  Greek,  and  that  method  of  writing  which  is  de- 
rived from  another  language.  This  is  necessary  in  order 
rightly  to  interpret  either.  In  regard  to  good  Greek, 
he  must  specially  consult  not  only  the  writers,  who 
have  used  the  popular  language,  but  writers  of  a  proxi- 
mate age,  who  have  imitated  the  Attic  diction,  though 
not  studiously.  Among  these  are  Polybius,  Diodorus 
Siculus,  and  Artemidorus  ;  in  which  authors  are  many 
words  common  to  the  New  Testament,  either  not  used 


OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT.  63 

at  all  by   the  old  Greeks,   or  else  used   in    a  different 
sense.     (Morus,  p.  238.— 240.) 

§  129.  Much  caution  necessary  to  decide  what  is  classic 
and  what  is  Hebrew-Greek  ;  Sept.  and  Hebrew  to  be  com- 
pared.  In  all  places,  therefore,  let  him  carefullj'  ex- 
amine whether  the  diction  he  pure  Greek,  or  not ;  in 
which  there  is  more  difficulty  than  one  mi«;ht  be  apt  to 
suppose.  Where  the  diction  departs  from  pure  Greek, 
let  him  resort  to  the  Hebrew.  To  do  this  properly,  he 
must  not  only  be  acquainted  with  the  genius  of  the  He- 
brew, as  it  is  developed  in  the  forms  and  tenses  of 
words,  in  the  construction  of  them,  and  in  the  junction 
of  the  members  of  a  sentence,  (which  however  will 
often  be  sufficient,)  but  he  must  also  know  in  what 
Greek  words  the  Jews  were  accustomed  to  express 
Hebrew  things,  when  they  spoke  in  the  then  common 
Greek  style,  without  aiming,  like  Philo  and  Josephus, 
at  elegant  classic  diction.  In  this  way,  by  a  proper 
comparison  with  the  Hebrew,  he  may  elicit  the  sense. 

Sometimes  there  is  no  better  method,  than  to  trans- 
late the  Greek  directly  into  the  Hebrew  ;  which  often- 
times may  be  easily  done  by  a  tolerable  Hebrew  scholar, 
both  as  it  respects  single  words,  and  also  phrases.  But 
at  other  times,  this  is  difficult  on  account  of  the  rare 
occurrence  of  words,  or  the  obscurity  of  them,  or  the 
dissimilar  etymology.  The  Septuagint,  therefore,  must 
often  be  consulted  ;  and  the  interpreter  should  be  so 
familiar  with  it,  as  readily  to  know  in  what  way  Hebrew 
expressions  are  translated  into  Greek.  For  as  the  origin  of 
speaking  and  writing  in  Greek,  concerningsacred  things, 
took  its  rise  from  that  Version,  so  it  is  evident,  that 

THIS  VERSION  MUST  BE    THE     BASIS    OF    ACQUAINTANCE    WITH 
THE  HEBREW-GREEK. 

It  will  be  useful,  also,  to  be  well  acquainted  with 
writers  on  the  Hebraisms  of  the  New  Testament,  in 
general  ;  such  as  Vorstius,  Leusden,  and  specially 
Gataker,  the  most  learned  of  them  all.  (Morus,  p.  241. 
ii.) 


64 


OF  FINDING  THE   USUS  LOQUENDI 


§  130.  Aquila  and  Symmachus  to  be  studied.  It  will 
be  proper,  moreover,  to  study  the  remains  ofAquila's 
Greek  Version,  which  exhibits  a  similar  diction  ;  as  he 
was  not  very  remote  from  the  age  of  the  apostles,  and 
has  some  things  in  his  Version,  which  ma}^  be  of  special 
use  here.  The  Version  of  Symmachus  should  also  be 
read,  who,  by  translating  into  pure  Greek,  has  made  the 
understanding  of  Hebrew  more  easy. 

In  addition  to  the  Hebrew-Greek  mentioned  in  H  128 — 130, 
the  Apocrypha  is  of  special  use  in  the  attainment  of  this  idiom.  The 
apocryphal  books  of  the  New  Testament,  also,  and  several  of 
the  apostolic  Fathers  exhibit  a  style,  in  many  respects  partak- 
ing of  this  idiom.     Comp.  Morus,  p.  241 — 245. 

§  131.  When  the  Hebrew  idiom  is  to  be  preferred.  It 
is  a  sound  maxim,  also,  that  when  the  same  word  or 
phrase  is  Hebraistic,  and  also  good  Greek,  and  a 
meaning  not  at  all  incongruous  may  be  assigned  to  it,  as 
used  according  to  either  idiom,  we  should  prefer  that 
sense  which  accords  with  the  Hebrew  idiom.  For  it  is 
more  probable  that  Hebrew  writers  used  the  latter 
idiom  ;  especially  if  the  phrase,  understood  as  classic 
Greek,  should  be  of  the  more  polished  and  refined 
kind.  Accordingly  I  should  explain  xaraffohjv  GuiQ^a- 
TOQ^  Hebrews  1 1  :  11 .  by  the  Hebrew  in  Genesis  4  :  25, 
rather  than  from  the  Greek  idiom.  So  (xnoOrjOicecv  iv 
cifiaQTLag^  John  8  :  24,  by  the  Greek  idiom  would  mean, 
you  will  persevere  to  the  end  of  life  in  sinning  ;  by  the  He- 
brew, you  will  be  condemned  on  account  of  your  sins. 
(Morus,  p.  246.  XI.) 

§  152.  In  the  doctrines  of  religion^  the  Hebrew  idiom  te 
he  specially  regarded.  An  interpreter  should  particu- 
larly observe,  that  when  things  appropriate  to  religion, 
specially  to  the  Christian  religion,  are*  spoken  of,  the 
idiom  should  be  referred  to  the  Hebrew ;  because  in 
speaking  of  religious  matters,  the  writers  of  the  New 
Testament  were  accustomed  to  use  the  phraseology  of 
the  Hebrew  Scriptures.     The  interpreter  will  be  mu  ch 


OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT.  65 

assisted  here  by  analogy  of  doctrine;  with  which  he 
ought  to  be  familiar,  lest  the  words  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment should  be  drawn  to  a  sense  alien  from  that  which 
the  authors  desired  to  express,  and  different  from  the 
essential  points  of  religion.     (Morus,  p.  246.  Xll.) 

§  1 33.  Specially  is  Hebrew  idiom  to  he' regarded  in  respect 
to  thefortns^  tenses^  and  numbers  of  words.  Nor  should 
the  maxims  here  inculcated  be  applied  only  to  the 
meaning  of  words  and  phrases,  but  also  to  the  forms  and 
tenses  of  verbs,  and  also  to  the  number  of  both  nouns 
and  verbs.  In  respect  to  these  things,  the  idiom  of 
the  New  Testament,  not  unfrequently,  departs  A-om 
classical  Greek,  and  follows  the  Hebrew.  An  interpre- 
ter, who  neglects  this,  will  fall  into  great  difficulties, 
and  commit  many  surprising  and  almost  ridiculous  mis- 
takes.    (Morus,  p.  248.) 

§  134.  Other  idioms  to  he  consulted,^  in  certain  cases. 
When  the  Hebrew  idiom  fails  us,  in  the  explication  of  a 
passage  or  word,  we  must  then  have  recourse  specially 
to  the  Syriac,  Chaldee,  or  to  Rabbinic.  All  concede  that 
we  should  have  recourse  to  the  Syriac  and  Chaldee  ; 
but  all  do  not  rightly  understand  the  nature  of  this 
comparison;  as  is  evident  from  the  attempts  of  some, 
who  have  endeavoured  to  cast  light  upon  the  Greek  of 
the  New  Testament,  by  comparing  the  Sj'riac  version 
of  it.  The  right  method  of  proceeding  is,  to  have  re- 
course to  the  Syriac,  when  we  find  ourselves  deserted 
by  the  Hebrew.  If  we  find  the  idiom  to  be  Syriac, 
then  we  can  attain  to  the  meaning  of  the  phrase  or 
word,  when  we  have  attained  a  right  understanding  of 
the  Syriac,  which  corresponds  with  it.  This  may  be 
more  easily  and  certainly  attained,  provided  the  Syri- 
ac be  still  a  living  language  ;  which,  however,  1  find  to 
be  doubted. 

The  same  may  be  said  of  the  Chaldee  and  Rabbinic. 
But  he  who  expects  aid  different  from  that  which  has 
just  been  described,  will  seek  and  hope  for  it  in  vain. 
*6 


66 


OF  FINDING  THE  USUS  LOQUENDl 


He  will  either  labour  to  no  purpose,  in  heaping  up 
what  will  be  useless ;  or  will  abuse,  to  a  bad  purpose, 
a  help  in  exegesis  which  is  by  no  means  to  be  despised. 
At  most,  he  will  only  be  able  to  determine,  whether  the 
Syriac  interpreter  has  rightly  translated  or  not.  (Mo- 
rus,  p.  249.  XIII.) 

§  135.  Direct  testimony  not  always  sufficient.  Thus 
far,  we  have  been  describing  the  method  of  discovering 
the  usiis  loquendi  in  particular  passages  of  the  New 
Testament,  by  evidence  which  we  call  direct.  But  al- 
though this  evidence  is  important  and  goes  very  far, 
yet  alone,  it  is  not  always  sufficient.  There  are  many 
things  in  the  New  Testament,  which  are  described  in  a 
novel  way,  because  the  things  themselves  are  new. 
Not  that  a  religion  absolutely  new  is  taught ;  but  an- 
cient doctrines  are  delivered  in  language  more  per- 
spicuous, appropriate,  and  distinctive,  the  veil  of 
figures  and  allegories  being  removed.  New  words 
were  therefore  necessary,  in  order  to  describe  new 
things ;  among  which  words  are  many,  that  are  adapt- 
ed to  designate  certain  things,  on  account  of  some  simi- 
litude to  them.  These  words,  by  the  way,  were  not 
invented  by  the  Apostles,  and  could  not  have  been  ; 
for  such  invention  is  a  thing  that  belongs  to  minds 
trained  up  by  literary  discipline,  and  not  to  unlet- 
tered men.  We  may  conclude,  therefore,  that  terms 
of  such  a  kind  were  suggested  by  the  Holy  Spirit ; 
which  is  an  argument  in  favour  of  the  divine  inspiration 
of  the  Scriptures.  Of  this  nature  are  such  words  as 
dat^fiOvcC^ffdaiy  TOiQza^ogj  avayevvav,  and  others.  ^Mo- 
rus,  p.  249.  XIV.) 

§  136.  J\'ew  words  to  be  explained  by  testimony  direct 
and  indirect.  Such  words  cannot  be  explained  from  the 
more  ancient  usus  loquendi;  but  have  an  interpretation 
peculiar  to  themselves,  yet  not  less  certain  than  the  other 
which  is  gathered  from  ancient  usage.  This  interpre- 
tation depends  on  the  direct  testimony  of  the  writers. 
Hence  it  must  be  gathered  from  the  collation  of  similar 


OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT. 


passages ;  as  we  have   already  taught   above.        (Mo- 
rns, p.  251.) 

§  137.  Greek  Fathers  to  be  consulted.  Nor  is  the  tes- 
timony of  the  ancient  Greek  Fathers  of  the  Church  by 
any  means  to  be  neglected,  which  has  respect  to  the 
meaning  of  words  and  phrases  ;  whether  it  be  the  testi- 
mony of  professed  interpreters,  or  of  other  writers. 
Respecting  a  choice  of  interpreters  among  the  Fathers, 
and  the  use  to  be  made  of  them,  we  shall  hereafter 
treat.  I  would  merely  observe  here,  that  in  those  au- 
thors, who  are  not  direct  interpreters,  passages  of  the 
New  Testament  now  and  then  occur,  in  such  a  connex- 
ion, or  with  such  adjuncts,  that  we  may  clearly  per- 
ceive what  meaning  the  age  attached  to  them.  Such 
interpretations  we  find  in  Clemens  Romanus,  Ignatius, 
Hippolytus,  Cyril  of  Jerusalem,  and  others.  The  in- 
terpreter, in  reading  such  authors,  should  diligently 
attend  to  this.     (Morus,  p.  251.  III.) 

§  138.  These  may  exhibit  interpretations  of  the  primitive 
age  of  Christianity.  In  writers  of  very  early  times, 
there  may,  not  improbably,  be  interpretations  that  have 
come  down  from  the  apostolic  age  ;  certainly  if  they 
are  consentaneous  with  apostolic  doctrines,  they  are  not 
lightly  to  be  rejected.  It  is  one  mark  that  they  are 
worthy  of  our  approbation,  if  they  are  of  a  character 
appropriate  to  the  apostolic  style,  formed  and  moulded 
after  the  genius  and  idiom  of  the  Hebrew,  {a)  (Morus, 
iibi  supra.) 

a)  But  who  will  venture  to  decide  upon  this,  except  by  the 
use  of  common  means  of  interpretation  ? 

§  139.  Glossaries.  The  ancient  Glossaries  maybe  of 
use  here,  specially  that  of  Hesychius  ;  in  which  is  found 
many  things  pertaining  to  certain  passages  of  the  Nevy 
TeMament,  that  were  deduced  from  the  most  ancient  in- 
terpreters of  it,  and  which  are  of  a  character  by  no 
means  to  be  despised. 


le 


G8  OF  FINDING    THE  USUS   LOQUENDI 

Similar  to  these  are  a  few  of  the  Glossaries  of  Sui- 
das,  and  also  of  Photian  ,•  both  of  which  are  to  be  used 
with  that  caution,  in  respect  to  any  particular  word, 
which  requires  us  well  to  ascertain,  whether  the  word 
in  the  Glossary  really  belongs  to  the  passage,  which 
we  desire  to  interpret. 

In  regard  to  all  these  things,  good  judgment  is  requi- 
site in  order  to  determine  what  is  useful,  and  what  is 
worthless,  and  to  distinguish  between  them  ;  which  is 
done,  much  in  the  way  that  has  been  above  described. 
(Morus,  p.  252.  IV.) 

§  140.  Glosses.  Even  the  glosses  in  some  MSS.  that 
have  crept  into  the  text  of  the  New  Testament  in  place 
of  the  true  reading,  may  be  used  to  assist  the  interpre- 
ter, either  to  understand  the  true  text,  or  to  find  means 
for  illustrating  or  contirming  the  true  interpretation 
Thus,  for  €Q6vi/7]oov^  in  John  7  :  b,  Chrysostom  has  the 
reading  eQMxrioov^  Homil.  51,  and  explains  it  by  ^aOe^ 
TOVTO  yuQ  iOTtv  eQ(OTr}Gov.  These  glosses  may  have 
flowed  from  the  ancient  schools,  instructed  by  Origen  ; 
although  some,  indeed,  may  have  proceeded  from  the 
Latin  Commentaries.     (Morus,  ubi  supra.) 

§141.  Context.  When  all  the  above  described  means 
fail,  we  must  then  resort  to  the  context,  and  to  the  well 
known  nature  of  the  things  themselves.  (Morus,  p. 
25^.  V.) 

§142.  Analogy  of  faith.  The  analogy  of  Scripture 
and  of  Christian  doctrine  should  be  always  before  our 
eyes,  so  that  the  interpretation  may  be  guided  b}^  it ; 
i.  e.  that  it  may  so  far  be  guided  by  it,  that  no  explana- 
tion contrary  to  it  should  be  adopted  ;  and  in  the  ob- 
scure phrases,  where  the  meaning  may  be  doubtful, 
the  sense  may  be  accommodated  to  the  analogy  of 
Scripture  sentiment. 

This  rule  need  not  be  wondered  at,  as  common 
sense  has  sanctioned  it,  and  applied  it  to  the  interpre- 
tation of  other  books  ;  all  of  which  are  to  be  explained, 


OF  THE  XEW    TESTAMENT.  69 

generally,  and  in   particular  passages,  agreeably  to  the 
analogy  of  that  doctrine  which  they  contain. 

Analogy  of  doctrine  or  faith  does  not  consist  in 
the  doctrine  which  is  approved  by  any  particular  body 
of  men,  as  uncandid  or  unskilful  persons  assert ;  for  then 
it  would  be  various  and  inconstant.  Grammatical  analo- 
gy is  the  rule  of  speaking,  or  form  of  speech,  constitut- 
ed by  the  laws  of  the  language,  which  is  opposed  to 
anomaly  or  a  method  of  speaking  in  opposition  to  usage, 
or  varying  from  it.  la  like  manner,  the  analogy  of 
sacred  doctrine  or  faith  consists  in  the  summary  of  re- 
ligion, and  the  rules  plainly  taught  in  the  Scriptures ; 
whence  the  Latin  Church  called  it  Regula  Fidei.  To 
this  analogy  all  things  are  to  be  referred,  so  that  noth- 
ing may  be  discordant  with  it.  And  when  this  is  done, 
the  analogy  of  faith  is  said  to  be  preserved.  Nor,  as  to 
faith  and  practice,  does  analogy  of  Scripture  differ 
from  analogy  of  doctrine.  Examples  of  analogy,  and 
of  judgment  agreeably  to  analogy,  may  be  found  in 
Galatians  6:  15,  10.  1  Corinthians  15:3 — 11,  &c. 
where  the  writer  calls  that  analogy  rcJ  uQMTa,  In  all 
the  departments  of  learning,  analogy  of  such  a  kind  has 
the  force  of  a  rule,  both  in  our  judgment  and  interpre- 
tation of  a  passage.     (Morus,  p.  253.  XVI.) 

In  a  special  .manner,  must  we  betake  ourselves  to 
analogy,  in  those  passages  which  seem  to  speak  what 
disagrees  with  that  which  is  plainly  taught  in  other 
parts  of  the  Scriptures,  and  with  common  sense,  con- 
cerning divine  and  human  things.  For  it  is  common  to 
all  uninspired  writers,  although  eloquent,  and  thinking 
and  writing  with  acuteness  and  subtilty,  that  when  they 
are  not  composing  a  summary  of  doctrine,  or  the  ele- 
ments of  it,  nor  treating  designedly  of  any  head  of 
doctrine,  they  exhibit  the  common  views  and  elements 
of  learning,  as  taught  by  the  usual  discipline  and  in- 
struction. Nor  do  they  always  speak  of  things  in  such 
a  way  as  a  subtile  and  scholastic  method  of  discipline 
would  demand ;  but  often  use  the  more  vulgar  and 
popular  methods  of  expression.  The  same  traits  of 
style  are   found   in  the  works   of  the   sacred  writers  \ 


70  OF   FINDlNeJ  THE  USUS  LOQlTENDl 

who,  in  all  respects,  desired  to  speak,  and  must  have 
spoken,  in  order  to  be  understood,  more  humano  ;  the 
Holy  Spirit  so  guiding  them,  that  they  differed  as  little 
as  posssible  from  the  usuhI  method  of  speaking.  It  is 
not  therefore  to  be  wondered  at,  if  we  find  in  their  ex- 
pressions some  things  seemingly  harsh,  since  this  is 
characteristic  of  the  oriental  genius  and  method  of  ex- 
pression.    (Morus,  pp.  i£55 — 259.) 

Respecting  the  subject  of  analogy,  compare  $  34. 

§  143.  Difficult  idioms  to  be  specially  studied.  The 
student,  who  aspires  to  the  faculty  of  interpreting, 
should  be  familiar  and  well  acquainted  with  the  more 
difficult  forms  of  speech,  in  the  sacred  writers,  or  those 
forms  which  differ  from  the  idioms  of  our  own  language, 
and  are  not  adapted  to  express,  with  simplicity  and  lo- 
gical accuracy,  principles  of  any  doctrine.  A  right 
understanding  of  these  he  must  by  all  means  attain  ;  so 
that  he  may  not  be  impeded  in  his  inquiries,  or  thrown 
into  embarrassment,  by  them.  E.  g.  many  things  are 
affirmed  simply  and  without  any  limitation^  which  how- 
ever, are  to  be  understood  as  having  only  a  particular 
and  partial  application.  Specially  is  this  the  case,  in 
moral  propositions.  In  like  manner,  active  verbs  do 
not  always  indicate  action  or  efficiency,  properly  con- 
sidered ;  which  Glass  in  his  Philol.  Sac,  Calovius  de 
persona  Christi  p.  527,  and  Turretine  de  interp.  Sac. 
Lilt.,  have  already  noted.     (Morus,  p.  256.  I.  11.) 

§144.  Difficult  forms  in  profane  writers  to  he  studi- 
ed. It  will  be  very  useful,  also,  to  attend  to  such  forms 
of  speech  in  common  books,  or  classics;  for  there  is 
scarcely  any  form  of  speech  in  the  Sacred  books,  which 
is  not  found  in  other  writings.  Nor  can  there  be  any 
doubt,  that  an  interpreter  will  understand  the  Scrip- 
tures with  much  more  facility,  if  he  be  familiar  and 
well  acquainted  with  the  difficulties  and  obscure  forms 
of  speech  in  other  books.  Those  things  which  ap- 
pear to  be  somewhat  hard,  or  clogged,  in  the  writings 
of  Paulj  will  not  be  wondered  at,  nor  give  offence,  if 


OF  TftE  NEW  TESTAMENT.  71 

©ne  goes  from  the  study  of  Thncydides  to  the  interpre- 
tation oftbe  Apostle.  Nor  will  such  an  one  l>e  ahumed 
at  fatHts,  which  seem  hardly  to  be  compatible  with  the 
dio^nity  and  sanctity  of  the  Scriptures  ;  nor  at  transpo- 
sitions, apparent  want  of  consistf my  in  construction,  en- 
allages,  and  the  like  things.  This  has,  indeed,  offen 
happened  to  some  good  men;  hut  they  were  not  well 
^skilled  m  the  languages.  Such  an  alarm  is  rather  the 
result  of  unlearned  superstition,  than  of  a  J!idicious 
reverence  for  the  word  of  God  ;  a**  Melancthon  has 
justly  observed.     Dedic.  Epist.  ad  Romanos. 


PART    II. 

CHAPTER  V. 

RULES  IN  RESPECT  TO  TROPICAL  LANGUAGE* 

[Keil,  pp.  115—128.     Beck,  pp.  129—136.     Seiler,  H  50— 78.'] 

5  145.  Design  of  this  chapter.  Having  explained  the 
method  of  finding  the  sense  of  the  New  Testament  by 
the  usus  loquendi^  or  other  artificial  aids,  we  come  now, 
to  treat  separately  of  certain  things  which  usually  are 
not  enough  explained,  nor  made  sufficiently  explicit  m 
regard  to  theory  or  practice.  The  first  of  these  re- 
spects tropes  ;  the  second,  emphasis  ;  the  third,  apparent 
contradictions^  or  discrepancies.     Of  these  in  their  order. 

§  146.  Duty  of  an  Interpreter^  in  respect  to  tropical 
language.  In  respect  to  tropical  language  the  office 
of  the  interpreter  is  two  fold.  Firsts  he  must  rightl}'' 
distinguish  it  from  language  not  tropical,  so  as  not  to 
mistake  the  one  for  the  other,  (as  formerly  the  disci- 
ples of  Jesus,  and    the  Jews  did,  in  respect  to  some  of 


72  RULES  IN  RESPECT 

the  Saviour's  discourses,)  (a)  and  so  as  not  to  pervert 
the  proper  sense  of  words  by  a  tropical  interpretation. 
Secondly^  he  must  rightly  interpret  tropes,  and  give 
their  true  sense.  For  it  often  happens,  that  men  think 
Ihey  have  attained  the  tropical  sense  of  words,  when 
they  understand  only  the  literal  one ;  and  they  are  de- 
luded by  an  empty  shadow,  or  pervert  the  trope  by  an 
etymological  interpretation.  To  avoid  these  faults,  it  is 
proper  to  give  rules,  drawn  from  the  nature  of  tropical 
diction  as  learned  from  use  and  observation,  by  which 
the  interpreter  may  be  guided  in  the  judging  and  in-  . 
terpreting  of  figurative  language.  (Morus,  p.  274.  IX.) 
a)  E.  g.  John  6;  52.     John  4;  11.  Matt,  16:  6—12. 

§  147.  Certain  rules  respecting  tropical  diction  examin- 
ed. In  order  to  judge  of  diction,  whether  it  should  be 
taken  in  a  literal  or  tropical  sense,  the  vulgar  maxim  is, 
JVot  readily  to  depart  from  the  literal  sense.  But  this  max- 
im is  neither  strictly  true^  nor  perspicuous,  nor  adapt- 
ed to  use.     (Morus,  p.  320.) 

JVot  easily  (non  facile,)  if  you  rightly  understand  the 
phrase,  means  almost  never.,  very  rarely.  This  is  errone- 
ous ;  for  tropes  in  the  sacred  writings  are  very  common ; 
so  much  so,  that  Glass  has  filled  a  large  volume  with 
them.  It  is  ambiguous;  for  it  describes  no  certain 
mark  or  characteristic  by  which  ^ropicflHanguage  may 
be  distinguished  from  that  which  is  to  be  literally  under- 
stood ;  which  is  certainly  a  great  fault,  in  a  rule. 

Danhauer,  Tarnoff,  and  Calovius  have  stated  the 
principle  in  question  with  more  distinctness,  when  they 
aver,  that  the  literal  meaning  is  not  to  be  deserted^  i^ithout 
evident  reason  or  necessity.  No  one  will  deny,  that 
where  there  is  plain  and  necessary  reason  for  departure 
from  the  literal  sense,  we  may  admit  the  tropical.  But 
some  apparent  repugnance  of  things,  or  facts,  is  not 
hastily  to  lead  us  to  reject  the  literal  seme.  The  older 
writers  regard  the  phrase  proper  sense.,  as  meaning  the 
same  as  the  literal  or  historic  sense;  and  rightly  teach, 
that  we  should  not  depart  from  the  customary  signification 


s 


TO  TROPICAL  LANGUAGE.  73 

of  a  word  without  a  weighty  and  sufficient  reason.  That 
we  may  sometimes  depart  from  it  is  evident,  from  the 
fact,  that  the  sacred  writers  themselves  do,  beyond  all 
doubt,  sometimes  depart  from  it.  And  indeed,  in  re- 
spect to  many  words,  the  tropical  sense  is  the  customary 
or  usual  one.     (Morus,  p.  320.) 

§  148.  How  to  examine  whether  language  is  tropical. 
We  may  commonlj  understand,  at  once,  whether  a 
word  is  to  be  taken  tropically  or  not,  by  simply  exam- 
ining the  object  spoken  of,  either  by  the  external  or 
internal  senses,  or  by  renewing  the  perception  of  the 
object.  To  judge  of  figurative  language,  in  such  cases, 
is  very  easy  ;  and  in  uninspired  writings,  it  very  rarely 
happens  that  there  is  any  doubt  about  it,  because  the 
objects  spoken  of  are  such  as  may  be  examined  by  our 
senses,  external  or  internal,  and  therefore  it  may  be 
easily  understood,  (a) 

In  the  Scriptures,  however,  doubts  have  frequently 
arisen  from  the  nature  of  the  subjects  there  treated ; 
which  are  such  as  cannot  be  subjected  to  the  examina- 
tion of  our  senses.  E.  g.  The  divine  nature,  {b)  divine 
operations,  &c,  are  subjects  beyond  the  scrutiny  of  our 
senses ;  and  the  question  whether  the  language  that 
respects  such  things  is  to  be  undersood  literally  or 
tropically,  has  given  rise  to  fierce  controversies,  which 
are  still  continued.(c)  In  these,  the  parties  have  often 
disputed  about  tropical  diction,  in  a  way  which  savoured 
more  of  metaphysical  or  diaiectical  subtilty  than  of 
truth.     (Morus,  p.  275.  XI.) 

a)  E.  g.  Inflamed  mind  we  understand  tropically,  by  repeating 
the  perception  of  the  idea  of  minc?,and  taking  notice  that  the  lite- 
ral meaning  of  inflamed  is  incongruous  with  it.  In  interpreting 
the  phrase,  snowy  locks.,  we  appeal  to  the  external  senses,  which 
determine  that  the  meaning  of  snowy  here  must  be  tropical. 

b)  To  the  language  which  respects  God  and  his  operations,  may 
be  added  all  that  respects  the  invisible  things  of  a  future  state  ; 
whatever  respects  heaven,  hell,  &c.  The  controversy,  whether 
descriptions  of  this  nature  are  to  be  literally  or  tropically  under- 
stood, is  by  no  means  at  an  end.  One  of  the  things  which  the  hu- 
man raind  learns  very  slowly,  is  to  detach  itself  from  conceptions 

7 


74  RULES   IN  RESPECT 

that  arise  from  material  objects,  and  to  perceive,  that  in  all  the  de- 
scriptions of  a  future  state,  words  are  of  absolute  necessity  em- 
ployed, which  originally  have  a  literal  sense,  because  language 
affords  no  other.  Even  the  internal  operationsof  our  own  mind, 
we  are  obliged,  for  the  same  reason,  to  describe  in  language  that 
of  necessity  must  be  tropically  understood.  Almost  all  men,  in- 
deed, now  allow  that  most  of  the  language  employed  to  describe 
God  and  his  operations,  is  necessarily  to  be  understood  as  tropic- 
al. Most  men  will  allow  that  the  language  which  respects  the  hea- 
venly world  may  be  so  considered  ;  but  what  regards  the  day  of 
judgment,  or  the  world  of  woe,  they  would  strenuously  contend, 
must  halileraUy  understood.  There  is,  indeed,  sufficient  in  con- 
sistency in  this,  and  it  betraj^s  no  small  degree  of  unacquaintance 
with  the  nature  and  principles  of  interpretation  ;  but  as  it  is  pro- 
ductive of  no  consequences  specially  bad,  the  error  is  hardly 
worth  combating.  The  motive,  no  doubt,  may  be  good,  which 
leads  to  the  adoption  of  this  error.  The  apprehension  is,  that  if 
you  construe  the  language  that  respects  the  day  ©rjudgment,  or 
the  world  of  woe  figuratively,  you  take  away  the  reality  of  them. 
Just  as  if  reality  did  not,  of  course,  lie  at  the  basis  of  all  figura- 
tive language,  which  would  be  wholly  devoid  of  meaning  with- 
out it.  But  how  inconsistent  too  is  this  objection  !  The  very 
person  who  makes  it,  admits  that  the  language  employed  to  de- 
scribe God,  and  liis  operations,  and  also  to  describe  the  heavenly 
world,  is  tropical ;  that  it  must  of  necessity  be  construed  so. 
But  does  this  destroy  the  reality  of  a  God,  and  of  his  operations, 
and  of  the  heavenly  world  ^ 

c)  Who  is  ignorant  of  the  innumerable  controversies  that  have 
arisen,  about  the  tropical  and  literal  sense  of  a  multitude  of  pas- 
sages in  the  Sacred  Writings  ?  Almost  all  the  enthusiasm  and  ex- 
travagance, that  have  been  exhibited  in  respect  to  religion,  have 
had  no  better  support,  than  gross  material  conceptions  of  figura- 
tive language  ;  or,  not  unfrequently,  language  that  should  be 
properly  understood,  has  been  tropically  construed.  There  is  no 
end  to  the  mistakes  on  this  ground.  Nor  are  they  limited  to  en- 
thusiasts and  fanatics.  They  develope  themselves  not  unfrequent- 
ly in  the  writings  of  men,  grave,  pious,  excellent,  and  in  other 
parts  of  theological  s'^ience  very  learned.  Indeed,  it  is  but  a  re- 
cent thing,that  it  has  come  to  be  considered  as  a  science, and  a  spe- 
cial and  essential  branch  of  theological  science — to  study  the  na- 
ture of  language,  and  above  all  the  nature  of  the  oriental,  bibli- 
cal languages.  Long  has  this  been  admitted  in  respect  to  the 
Classics,  and  all  works  of  science  in  ancient  languages.  But  in 
regard  to  the  Bible,  the  most  ancient  book  in  the  world,  and 
written  in  a  language,  the  idiom  of  which  is  exceedingly  diverse 
from  our  own,  it  seems  to  have  been  very  generally  taken  for 
granted,  that  no  other  study  was  necessary  to  discover  its  mean- 


TO  TROPICAL  LANGUAGE.  75 

ing,  than  what  is  devoted  to  any  common  English  book.  At 
least,  a  Bible  with  marginal  references,  studied  by  a  diligent  and 
careful  use  of  these  references,  might  surely  be  understood,  in  a 
most  satisfactory  manner.  In  very  many  cases,  the  Jirst  thing 
has  been  to  study  theology  ;  the  second^  to  read  the  bible  in  order 
to  find  proofs  of  what  had  already  been  adopted  as  matter  of 
belief.  This  order  is  now  beginning  to  be  reversed.  The  nature 
of  language,  of  Scripture  language,  of  figurative  language,  and 
of  interpretation,  is  now  beginning  to  be  studied  as  a  science, 
the  acquisition  of  which  is  one  of  the  greatest  ends  of  study  ; 
as  it  is  the  only  proper  mode  of  leading  a  theologian,  to  the  know- 
ledge of  what  the  bible  really  contains.  Here  too  is  a  common 
arbiter  of  the  disputes  that  exist  in  the  Christian  world.  The 
nature  of  language  and  of  tropical  words,  thoroughly  understood, 
will  prostrate  among  all  intelligent  and  candid  men,  who  really 
love  the  truth,  a  great  part  of  all  the  diversities  of  opinion  that 
exist. 

§  149.  Certain  words  not  tropical.  Those  words  are 
not  to  be  regarded  as  tropical  which  have  lost  their 
original  and  proper  signification,  and  are  ysed  no  longer 
in  any  but  a  secondary  sense  ;  as  we  have  already 
shewn. 

§  150.  Words  tropical^  where  the  subject  and  predicate 
disagree.  Beyond  all  doubt  those  phrases  are  tropical, 
the  subject  and  predicate  of  which  are  heterogeneous  ; 
as  where  corporeal  and  incorporeal,  animate  and  inani- 
mate, rational  and  irrational  are  conjoined  ;  (a)  and  also 
species  of  a  different  genus.  Things  that  cannot  possi- 
bly exist  in  any  particular  subject,  cannot  be  logicallj^ 
predicated  of  it;  for  the  fundamental  rules  of  logic,  in 
respect  to  this,  are  inherent  in  the  human  mind.  If 
then  such  things  appear  to  be  predicated,  the  phrase 
must  be  tropically  understood.     (Morus,  p.  278.  XII.) 

By  this  rule,  the  language  of  the  New  Testament 
should  be  interpreted,  which  respects  the  person  of 
Jesus,  to  whom  divine  and  human  qualities  are  attribut- 
ed. For  the  latter  are  attributed  to  him  as  a  man  ; 
the  former,  as  a  divine  person  united  with  the  human  ; 
and  therefore  they  may  be  properly  understood. 

a.)  E.  g.  The  Jields  smile^  the  stones  cry  oitty  ihe  floods  clap  their 
hands ^  &c. 


76  RULES    IN   RESPECT 

§  13K  Laws^  history^  didactic  works^  seldom  admit 
tropes.  As  the  customary  use  of  language  *hews  the 
above  principle  to  be  correct,  so  the  same  use  also 
shews,  that  tropical  language  is  rarely  employed  in 
several  cases  now  to  be  mentioned,  if  you  except  words 
which  have  lost  their  primary  signification,  or  such  as 
constitute  very  easy  tropes.  Legislators  in  their  sta- 
tutes ;  historians  in  their  narations  of  facts,  where  they 
aim  simply  at  the  declaration  of  them,  (for  some  narra- 
tions are  designedly  ornate,  and  decorated  to  please  the 
fancy  ;)  and  those  who  teach  any  hrauch  of  science, 
where  the  direct  object  is  teaching,  and  not  merely  oc- 
casional allusion  ;  all  these  employ  tropes  very  seldom. 
Hence  it  follows,  that  in  writings  of  such  a  kind,  tropes 
are  not  to  be  acknowledged,  unless  it  can  be  clearJy 
shewn,  that  either  by  general  usage,  or  by  the  use  of 
the  writer,  certain  tropical  words  are  appropriated  to 
designate  particular  things.  Of  this  nature,  are  several 
words  of  the  New  Testament,  e.  g.  those  which  signi- 
{y  illumination^  regeneration^  &c.     (Morus,  p.  281.  XIY.^ 

The  principle  laid  down  in  this  section  needs  more  explana- 
tion, it  is  not  correct,  that  in  the  Mosaic  Law,  for  example, 
and  in  the  Gospels  and  Epistles,  there  are  not  a  great  abundance 
of  tropical  words.  But  still,  it  is  true  that  these  compositions,  so 
far  as  they  are  mere  precept,  mere  narration,  and  mere  lan- 
guage of  instruction,  comprize  as  few  tropes  as  the  nature  of  the 
case  will  admit,  and  these  mostlj  of  the  easier  and  more  obvious 
kind. 

The  importance  of  the  principle  thus  defined,  is  very  great. 
Some  interpreters,  in  ancient  and  modern  times,  have  turned  into 
allegory  the  whole  Jewish  ceremonial  Law.  So,  formerly  and  re- 
cently, the  history  of  the  creation  of  the  world,  the  fall  of  man, 
the  flood,  the  account  of  the  tower  of  Babel,  &c,  have  been  ex- 
plained either  as  fxvOov,  or  as  philosophical  allegories,  i.  e.  phi- 
losophical speculations  on  these  subjects,  clothed  in  the  garb  of 
narration.  By  the  same  principles  of  exegesis,  the  gospels  are 
treated  as  ^ivdot,  which  exhibit  an  imaginary  picture  of  a  per- 
fect character,  in  the  person  of  Jesus.  In  a  word,  every  narra- 
tion in  the  Bible,  of  an  occurrence  which  is  of  a  miraculous  na- 
ture in  any  respect,  is  fJLvdog  ;  which  means,  as  its  abettors  say, 
that  some  real  fact  or  occurrence  lies  at  the  basis  of  the  story, 
which  is  told  agreeably  to  the  very  imperfect  conceptions   and 


TO  TKOPICAL  I^ilNGUAGB.  77 

philosophy  of  ancient  tinies,    or  has    been  augmented  and  adorn- 
ed by  tradition  and  fancy. 

But  that  such  liberties  with  the  language  of  Scripture  are  ut- 
terly incompatible  with  the  sober  principles  of  interpretation,  is 
sufficiently  manifest  from  the  bare  statement  of  them.  The  ob- 
ject of  the  interpreter  is,  to  Jind  out  uhat  the  sacred  writers 
meant  to  say.  This  done,  his  task  is  performed.  Party  philoso- 
phy or  scepticism  cannot  guide  the  interpretation  of  language. 
Comp.     Morus,  pp.  281—291. 

§  152.  Usus  loquendi  in  regard  to  things^  which  cannot 
he  examined  by  our  feelings  and  conceptions.  In  regard 
to  divine  things,  which  can  be  known  merely  by  reve- 
lation, and  cannot  be  examined  by  the  test  of  our  own 
feelings  or  views,  we  can  judge  only  from  the  nsus  lo- 
quendi of  the  sacred  writers,  whether  their  language  is 
to  be  understood  literally  or  tropically. 

This  usage  can  be  known  only  from  the  comparison 
of  similar  passages  ;  which  is  done  in  various  ways. 
(1)  When  different  words  are  employed,  in  different  [)as- 
sages,  respecting  the  same  thing,  it  is  easy  to  judge 
wiiich  are  tropical.  E.  g.  Thie  phrase  to  he  born  of 
water^  John  3  :  5,  is  tropical  ;  for  the  same  thing  is  lit- 
erally expressed  in  Mark  16  :  16. (a)  (2)Whenthe  same 
word  is  used  every  where,  respecting  the  same  thing,  it 
has  a  proper  sense.  (6)  (3.)  VVhen  the  same  method  of 
expression  is  constantly  used  respecting  divers  things, 
which  are  similar,  or  which  have  some  special  con- 
nexion, it  is  to  be  understood  literally,  (c)  (Morus,  p. 
291.  XV.) 

a)  So  the  JH'^n^  covenant  which  God  made  with  Abraliam,  is 
explained  in  Gal.  S\  16,  as  meaning  a  promise,  I'he  latter,  as  be- 
ing plain,  is  to  direct  us  in  the  interpretation  of  the  other. 

b)  E.g.  avaaruGig  ve^QO)i',  eyatQeruo  Ob)(.ia,  ^Monoteirao 
are  constantly  used  in  respect  to  what  is  to  take  place  at  the  end 
of  the  world,  and  therefore  are  not  tropical. 

c)  Which  rule  requires  some  abatement.  E.  g.  God  gave 
the  Israelites  bread  from  heaven,,  and  Christ  gives  his  disci- 
ples bread  from  heaven.  The  latter  is  very  different  from  manna. 
In  fact, the  latter  case  is  plainly  an  instance  of  tropical  language. 
The  context,  then,  or  nature  of  the  subject  treated  of,  is  to  be 
our  guide  in  such  cases. 

7* 


78  RULES    IN    RESPECT 

§  153.  Jidjuncis  useful  in  determinmg 'when  xoords  art 
tropical.  We  may  also  form  a  judgment  respecting 
tropical  language,  from  the  adverbs,  epithets,  or  other 
limitations  expressing  the  manner  or  nature  of  things. 
(Morus,  p.  295.  XVI.) 

This  case  resolves  itself  substantially  into  the  principle  of  the 
following  Section. 

§  154.  Context  to  be  consulted.  The  context  also 
will  frequently  assist  us.  For  when  the  whole  passage 
19  allegorical,  we  must  acknowledge  a  trope  in  particu- 
lar parts  that  are  connected  with  the  w^hole  allegory. 
E.  g.  TivQog  in  1  Corinthians  3  :  13,  which  relates  to 
'^vXa  and  ^^qtov  in  the  context.  In  like  manner 
the  language  is  to  be  regarded  as  tropical,  when  al- 
though the  preceding  context  is  to  be  literally  under- 
stood, there  is  a  manifest  transition  to  allegory.  (Mo- 
ras, ubi  supra.     Compare  also  §  99.) 

Thus  far,  respecting  the  means  of  distinguishing 
what  is  tropical. 

§  155.  Sources  of  tropical  interpretation.  In  regard 
to  interpreting  tropical  language,  we  may  observe,  that 
there  are  two  sources  of  aid.  The  one  is,  the  subject 
itself;  the  other,  the  usiis  Uquendi,  The  interpreta- 
tion by  the  aid  of  the  subject  is  easy,  when  the  nature 
of  it  affords  an  obvious  similitude;  e.  g.  qjojTCOfiog  is 
easily  understood  as  used  tropically. 

In  regard  to  the  usus  loquendi ;  the  general  usage  of 
the  Hebrew  tongue  in  respect  to  tropical  words  must 
be  first  understood,  as  in  words  corresponding  to  fojt;, 
i'O'avciTOv^  Tifxri,  ^o|?;,  &c  ;  then  Greek  usage  in  general. 
Passages  must  also  be  compared,  in  which  the  same 
thing  is  expressed  by  a  proper  word,  or  in  which  such 
proper  word  is  employed  in  the  context,  so  that  the 
sense  is  obvious.  Here  too,  we  may  use  the  com- 
parison of  words  that  are  conjoined  and  similar;  exam- 
ples of  which  will  hereafter  be  produced. 

§  166.  Caution  to  he  used  in  judging  from  etymology. 


TO  TROPICAL  LANGUAGE.  79 

Vfe  must  be  very  cautious,  however,  not  to  judge  of 
tropes  from  mere  etymology  ;  as  this  is  very  fallacious. 
E.  g.  OQQoTO^eiv,  2  Tim.  2:  15,  some  have  interpret- 
ed as  implying  a  distinction  between  the  law  and  the 
gospel,  which  is  mere  trifling.  For  loyog  ah]6etag  in 
the  context,  means  {\\q.  gospel ;  the  law  is  not  the  sub- 
ject of  discourse  here.  Analogy  of  the  language  might 
have  taught  them,  that  oQQoro^ieiv  here  means  io  pos- 
sess right  views  of  the  gospel^  and  correctly  to  communi- 
cate these  to  others.  So  the  ancients  understood  it,  and 
among  the  moderns,  Gerhard  ;  oqOoto^uc:,  being  an- 
ciently commuted  with  ooOodolta,  and  nacvoro^ecv  be- 
ing used  to  signifj^,  entertaining  and  disseminatmg  novel 
opinions  respecting  religion,       (Morus,  p.  298.   XIX.) 

§  1 57.  Method  of  determining  whether  a  trope  is  adequate- 
ly understood.  It  is  one  proof  that  you  understand  tropical 
language,  if  you  can  substitute  proper  words  for  tropical 
ones.  Not  that  a  person,  who  can  do  this,  always  right- 
ly understands  the  words ;  but,  if  he  cannot  do  it,  he 
certainly  does  not  understand  them.  The  sacred  wri- 
ters themselves  sometimes  subjoined  proper  words  to 
tropical  ones,  e.  g.  Col.  2  :  7.  The  best  Greek  and  Latin 
writers  frequently  do  the  same  thing. 

It  is  useful  also  to  make  the  experiment,  whether, 
when  the  image  presented  by  the  tropieal  expression  is 
removed  from  the  mind,  any  idea  still  remains  in  it,  (dif- 
ferent from  the  image  itself,)  which  can  be  expressed 
by  a  proper  word.  This  experiment  is  specially  to  be 
made,  when  words  designating  sensible  objects  are 
transferred  to  the  expression  of  intellectual  ones,  (e.g. 
BavaTog.,  fw?;,  diaOi^virj,  &c  ;)  i\\  respect  Io  which  it  is 
easy  to  l3e  deceived.     (Morus,  p.  300.  XX.) 

The  context,  the  nature  of  the  subject,  and  parallel  passages 
are  the  most  eifectua]  means  of  ascertaining  this. 

OF    ALLEGORIES. 

[Compare  Keil,  pp.  115—120.  Beck,  p.  129.  11.  Seller,  $§ 
41 — 78.  Much  more  satisfactory  will  be  Morus,  Dissert, 
de  causis  Allegorm  explicandis,  in  bis  Disserit.  Theol.  philoL 
Vol.  I.  pp.  370—393.] 


80  ALLECORILS. 

§  158.  Allegories  hoii)  interpreted.  As  allegories  fre- 
quently occur  in  the  sacred  books,  which  abound  in 
tropical  diction,  it  seems  proper  to  say  something  here 
of  the  method  of  interpreting  them.  First  of  all,  the 
general  design  of  the  allegory  is  to  be  ascertained ; 
which  is  easily  done  when  it  is  connected  with  a  con- 
text explanatory  of  its  design.  For  the  most  part, 
however,  it  is  expressly  declared.  (Morus,  p.  301. 
XXI.) 

^XhiywQta  is  derived  from  cdXo  ayoQiiraiy  i.  e.  a 
different  thing  is  said  from  that  -^vhich  is  meant.  It  differs  from 
metaphor,  in  that  it  is  not  confined  to  a  word,  but  extends  to  a 
whole  thought,  or,  it  may  be,  to  several  thoughts.  Allegory  may 
be  expressed,  moreover,  by  pictures,  Kzech.  4:1;  by  ac- 
tions Ezech.  III.  IV.  V.  Luke  22  :  30,  or  by  any  significant  thing. 

One  most  important  principle  in  explaining  allegories,  is  omit- 
ted by  Ernesti.  1  refer  to  the  rule,  that  coniparison  is  not  to  be 
extended  to  alt  the  circumstances  of  the  allegory,  "^I'hus  in  the 
parable  of  the  good  Samaritan,  the  point  to  be  illustrated  is, 
the  extent  of  the  duty  of  beneficence.  Most  of  the  circum- 
stances in  the  parable  go  to  make  up  merely  the  verisimilitude 
of  the  narration,  so  that  it  may  give  pleasure  to  him  who  hears 
or  reacts  it.  But  how  differently  does  the  whole  appear,  when 
it  comes  to  be  interpreted  by  an  allegorizer  of  the  mystic  school  ? 
The  man  going  down  from  Jerusalem  to  Jericho  is  Adam  won- 
dering in  the  wilderness  of  this  world  ;  the  thieves  v^^ho  robbed 
and  wounded  him  are  evil  spirits ;  the  priest  who  passed  by 
on  the  one  side  without  relieving  him,  is  the  Levitical  law;  the 
Levite  is  good  works  ;  the  good  Samaritan  is  Christ ;  the  oil 
and  wine  are  grace.  Sac,  What  may  not  a  parable  be  made  to 
mean,  if  imagination  is  to  supply  the  place  of  reasoning  and  phi- 
lology ?  And  what  riddle,  or  oracle  of  Delphos  could  be  more 
equivocal,  or  of  more  multifarious  significancy,  than  the  Bible,  if 
such  exegesis  be  admissible  .''  It  is  a  miserable  excuse,  which 
interpreters  make  for  themselves,  that  they  render  the  Scrip- 
tures more  edifying  and  significant,  by  interpreting  them  in  this 
manner.  And  are  the  Scriptures  then  to  he  made  more  signifi- 
cant than  God  has  made  them  ;  or  to  be  mended  by  the  skill  of 
the  interpreter,  so  as  to  become  more  edifying  than  the  Holy 
Spirit  has  made  them  ?  If  there  be  a  semblance  of  piety  in  such 
interpretations,  a  semblance  is  all.  Real  piety  and  humility  ap- 
pear to  advantage,  in  receiving  the  Scriptures  as  (hey  are, 
and  expounding  them  as  simply  and  skilfully  as  the  rules  of  lan- 
guage will  render  practicable,  rather  than  by  attempting  to 
amend  and  improve  the  revelation  which  God  has  made. 


ALLEGORIES.  81 

§  169.  This  being  done,  the  primary  word  is  to  be 
sought  for,  and  the  force  of  it  expressed  by  a  proper 
word.  Other  tropical  words  are  then  to  be  explained, 
agreeably  to  this,  {a)  In  this  way,  the  explanation  of 
particular  things  will  be  rendered  more  easy,  and  we 
may  avoid  errors.  The  design  of  the  exhortation  in 
the  form  cf  allegory,  found  in  1  Corinthians  5  :  6,  is, 
that  the  Corinthians  should  be  purified  from  vitious  in- 
clinations, and  the  faults  springing  from  them.  Zvfit], 
therefore,  here  means  vice  ;  cc^vfiog  free  from  vice^  viz. 
to  be  a  true  Christian.  ^EoQxa^eLv^  consequently,  is 
not  to  celebrate  a  feast,  (according  to  its  proper  signi- 
fication,) for  a  tropical  meaning  is  required.  It  means 
to  serve  God^  to  worship  God^  to  he  a  Christian^  to  be 
free  from  former  vices  ^  and  worship  him  in  purity. 

It  is  altogether  incongruous  to  understand  one  part 
literally  and  another  tropically,  in  the  same  allegory  ;(6) 
as  those  do,  who  take  nvQog^  in  1  Corinthians  3:15, 
literally,  when  all  the  context  is  to  be  understood  tro- 
pically, Indt?^d  the  expresdon  wV  ^^«  tivqq^  pnakes 
it  plain,  that  the  word  is  to  be  figuratively  understood, 
(Morns,  p.  309.  XXV.) 

(a)  The  meaning  of  the  author  is,  that  trie  word  which  desig- 
nates the  leading  design  of  the  allegory  being  explained,  the  re- 
mainder is  to  be  interpreted  in  conformity  with  it. 

(6)  This  rule  is  of  great  importance,  and  of  wide  extent.  I 
wish  I  could  add,  that  it  is  not  every  day  transgressed,  by  multi- 
tudes who  expound  the  Scriptures. 

To  the  brief  precepts  here  given  by  Eraesti,  may  be  added 
from  Morus,  (1)  That  we  must  sometimes  resort  to  history,  in 
order  fully  to  explain  allegory.  E.  g.  The  kingdom  of  God  is 
likened  to  leaven,  which  gradually  ferments  the  whole  mass  into 
which  it  is  put ;  and  to  a  grain  of  mustard  seed,  v/hich  gradual- 
ly springs  up  and  becomes  a  large  plant.  History  shews  that 
the  Church  has  arisen  from  small  beginnings,  and  is  extending 
itself  through  the  earth.  (2)  The  nature  of  the  subject  wiU  fre- 
quently direct  the  interpretation  of  the  allegory.  E.  g.  Ye  art 
the  salt  of  the  earth,  &c,  Matthew  5:13.  The  subject  is,  the  in- 
structions to  be  given  by  the  disciples.  The  leading  word  (salt) 
in  the  allegory  means  instruction ;  and  the  sentiment  of  the  passage 
is.  Ye  are  the  teachers,  by  whom  others  are  to  be  preserved  from 
corruption,  i.  e.  destruction,     See  Morus,  pp.  311. — 313. 


82  ALLEGORIES. 

§  160.  Parables.  Not  unlike  to  the  method  of  inter- 
preting allegories,  is  that  of  explaining  parai/es  ;  which 
often  contain  allegory.  We  must  guard  here  against 
urging  too  far  the  meaning  of  all  parts  of  a  parabolical 
narration  ;  and  refer  the  particular  parts  to  the  gener- 
al design,  so  that  all  may  be  accommodated  to  it.  It  is 
a  very  common  fault  of  interpreters  to  urge  the  expla- 
nation too  far  ;  but  it  is  a  very  great  fliult.  Therefore, 
in  Luke  15:  11,  &c,  we  are  not  to  seek  for  a  doctrinal 
meaning  in  (jroXfj^  fioo)^og,  du^Arvhog,  &c.  Such  cir- 
cumstances are  commonly  added  to  complete  the  form 
of  the  narration,  and  to  make  it  a  more  finished  picture 
of  what  might  be  supposed  to  have  happened;  as  is 
commonly  done  in  stories,  fables,  and  other  things  of 
like  nature.     (Morus,  pp.  314 — 320.) 

Parable^  in  Greek  usage,  means  any  comparison  introduced  in^ 
to  a  discourse.  It  may  be  called  an  example,  taken  from  things 
real  or  fictitious,  designed  tor  special  and  graphical  illustration. 
The  means  of  explaining  it  are,  the  context,  the  subject,  the 
occasion,  &ic,  as  in  allegory.  The  caution  suggested  by  Ernesti, 
against  interpreting  all  the  minute  circumstances  of  a  parable  so 
as  to  give  them  a  mystic  significancy,  is  very  important. 

It  should  be  added  here,  that  allegory  differs  from  parable  only 
in  the  style,  and  mode  of  expression.  Take  an  allegory  and  ex- 
press it  in  the  historic  style,  and  you  convert  it  into  a  parable. 
Hence,  the  same  rules  of  exegesis  apply  to  both.  Comp.  Beck, 
p.  134.  Keil,  H  78—81.  Seiler,  71—78  and  ^  183.  But  spe- 
cially worthy  of  thorough  study,  is  Storr''s  Comment,  de  parabolis 
Chrisli,  Opuscula.  Vol.  1 .  p.  89.  See  also  Lowlh's  Lectures  on 
Allegory  and  Parables,  Lect.  x— xii. 


83 


PART  II. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

itVLES    RESPECTING    EMPHASIS. 

[Keil,  $  42.     Beck,  p.  130.  III.     Seller,  }J  65—70.] 

§  161.  Errors  respecting  emphasis  very  frequent.  In 
no  part  of  an  interpreter''s  business,  are  errors 
more  frequently  committed,  than  in  judging  of  empha- 
sis. The  reason  of  this  is,  that  many  are  too  prone  to 
find  emphasis  every  where  ;  supposing  that  by  so  doing, 
they  exhibit  the  sacred  writers  as  speaking  in  a  manner 
more  worthy  of  themselves,  and  the  divine  origin  of  the 
Scriptures.  However,  nothing  can  have  dignity  attach- 
ed to  it,  which  has  not  truth  for  its  basis. 

§162.  Ground  of  these  errors.  The  ground  of  this  is 
want  of  skill  in  the  knowledge  of  the  original  Scripture 
languages;  for  many  who  interpret,  are  obliged  in 
general,  to  depend  merely  on  the  definitions  of  Lexi- 
cons, and  are  ignorant  of  the  analogy  of  languages,  be- 
cause they  have  not  been  sufficiently  accustomed  to 
these  studies.  It  is  comjnon  for  men  of  this  sort,  to 
push  etymologies,  specially  tropical  ones,  to  an  exces- 
sive length  ;  from  which  very  little  that  is  useful  can  be 
extracted.  Yet  tVom  these,  they  form  notions  which 
never  entered  the  minds  of  the  sacred  writers.  They 
form,  moreover,  rules  respecting  Emphasis,  indepen- 
dently either  of  any  reason  drawn  from  the  nature  of 
things  and  of  language,  or  of  the  usus  loqucndi. 

Mistakes  such  as  these  may  be  very  easily  com- 
mitted, in  respect  to  the  Hebrew  language,  in  regard  to 
those  forms  of  speech  in  the  New  Testament,  which  are 


S4  RULES    RESPECTING  EMPHASIS. 

deduced  from  the  Hebrew ;  because  this  idiom  is  so 
unlike  the  occidental  languages  of  modern  Europe. 

§  163.  JVeed  of  rules  to  direct  us  in  judging  of  empha- 
sis. On  this  account,  there  is  the  more  need  of  well 
grounded  precepts,  drawn  from  the  nature  of  human 
language  and  of  things,  that  we  may  judge  correctly  of 
emphasis ;  so  that  we  may  neither  pass  by  those  which 
are  real,  nor  follow  after  those  which  are  imaginary. 
Erasmus,  (on  1  Corinthians,  7:1.)  thinks  this  may  be 
endured  in  hortatory  and  consolatory  preaching;  but 
for  myself,  I  had  rather  every  thing  should  have  a  solid 
foundation  ;  as  there  is  no  need  of  any  thing  fictitious. 
In  serious  argument,  fictitious  emphasis  is  intolerable. 
Indeed  it  is  nothing  less  than  to  sport  with  that  which 
is  sacred. 

§  164.  Insufficient  rules.  The  vulgar  rule,  which 
bids  us  beware  of  making  fictitious  emphasis  or  of  ne- 
glecting real  ones,  although  good  sense,  is  in  fact  no 
rule  ;  as  it  does  not  serve  at  all  to  direct  the  mind  in 
judging  where  emphasis  really  exists.  No  one  believes 
himself  to  make  Jic^i^io?i5  emphasis.  There  are  some 
other  maxims  concerning  emphasis,  which  are  not  form- 
ed with  good  judgment,  nor  worthy  of  refutation  here. 

§  165.  Kinds  of  writing.,  where  emphasis  is  rare.  To 
proceed  with  precepts.  First^  It  is  clear,  that  in  re- 
gard to  subjects  which  are  to  be  explained  with  great 
nicety ;  in  perspicuously  exhibiting  the  precepts  that 
respect  any  branch  of  the  sciences;  in  laws  ;  in  simple 
narrations  of  facts,  &c,  emphasis  can  scarcely  find  place. 
For  emphasis  is,  in  a  certain  sense,tropical  or  figurative  ; 
and  this  kind  of  language  does  not  belong  to  writings  of 
the  classes  just  named,  as  I  have  already  shewn,  §151, 
and  as  all  concede.     (Morus,  p.  330.  XI.) 

That  is,simp!e  narration,  simple  instruction,  simple  legislation, 
for  the  most  part  is  destitute  of  emphases,  except  such  as  are  9( 
the  lower  and  more  usual  kinds.  But  in  the  Pentateuch,  Gospels, 


RULES  RESPECTING   EMPHASIS.  85 

and  Epistles,  for  example,  which  are  specimens  of  the  different 
kinds  of  composition  in  question,  are  intermixed  many  parts 
which  contain  words  that  are  emphatic. 

§  166.  Ao  word  of  itself  is  emphaiical.  Secondly, 
We  must  guard  against  finding  emphasis  in  any  word  of 
itself,  whether  used  properly  or  tropically  ;  because, 
as  has  been  already  shewn,  no  word  used  either  figura- 
tively or  literally,  has  of  itself  an  emphasis.  Emphasis 
implies  an  accession  of  meaning  to  the  ordinary  significa" 
tion  of  a  word, 

§  167.  Emphasis  not  to  be  taught  by  etymology^  or  re- 
curring to  the  original  sense  of  words.  Thirdly.  Empha- 
sis should  not  be  deduced  from  the  etymology  of  a 
word,  (which  often  misleads  as  to  the  proper  sense  of 
it;)  nor  in  tropical  expressions  should,  we  recur  to  the 
proper  sense  of  the  words  to  deduce  emphasis  from  it; 
as  has  sometimes  been  done  in  respect  to  the  word 
eQBvvav.  Tropically  used,  this  word  does  not  signify 
to  seek  with  great  exertion  and  diligence  ;  for  the  Ho- 
ly Spirit  is  said  eQevvav  ra  fiaOrj  xtjg  OiorriTog,  to  whom 
this  emphatic  meaning  surely  will  not  apply.  The 
ancient  interpreters  used  SQfvvav  in  the  same  sense  as 
ycvcoonet^v.  In  both  of  the  above  points,  errors  are  very 
frequent.     (Moras  p.  331.  XII.) 

§  168.  Prepositions  in  composition  do  not  always  make 
any  accession  of  meaning  to  a  word.  In  Greek  words, 
moreover,  we  are  to  take  special  care  not  to  make  any 
accession  of  signification  to  the  word,  simply  because 
it  is  compounded  with  a  preposition.  E.  g.  ava,  ccno, 
TiQOf  xnvVf  £x,  TitQt,  compounded  as  in  ccvugtccvqovv 
avavrideiv,  ovfifxapTv^ecv,  nQoyivojGiiecv,  &c.  Many  are 
accustomed  to  build  arguments  on  such  imaginary  em- 
phasis, and  oftentimes  very  incongruously  ;  while  use 
and  observation  teach  us,  that  these  prepositions  do  not 
always  change  the  meaning  of  simple  words  ;  nay, 
they  very  commonly  are  redundant,   as  in   Polybius. 


86  RULES  RESPECTING  EMPHASIS. 

The  custom  of  the  language,  in  such  cases,  must  be 
well  studied.     (Morus,  p.  331.  Xlll.) 

§  169.  Emphasis  not  to  be  deduced  merely  from  the 
plural  number.  We  must  be  Cdutious,  also,  that  we  do 
not  deduce  emphasis  merely  from  the  use  of  the  plural 
number,  supposing  that  where  the  plural  is  put  instead 
of  the  singular,  it  necessarily  denotes  emphasis.  This 
is  not  correct,  either  in  regard  to  Hebrew  {a)  or  Greek. 
With  good  reason,  Melancthon  blames  Origen,  for  mak- 
ing a  distinction  between  ovgavov  and  ovQuvovg,  A 
similar  mistake  Origen  also  made,  in  regard  to  ot^yiviQ- 
(iio7g  in  Romans  12  :  1  ;  which  many  have  incautiously 
imitated  :  as  Bengel  has  the  former  error.  (Morus,  p. 
332.  XIV.) 

a)  If  all  that  is  meant  here,  be  simply  that  some  nouns  have  only 
a  plural  form  ;  that  others  are  used  both  in  the  singular  and  plu- 
ral, with  the  same  meaning  ;  and  that  in  neither  of  these  cases  is 
emphasis  to  be  found  ;  all  this  may  readily  be  conceded.  But 
Ernesti,  and  his  commentators,  Morus  and  Eichstaedt,  have 
stated  the  assertion  in  the  absolute  form,  that  the  plural  has  no 
emphasis,  even  in  the  Hebrew  language.  I  have  softened  this  as- 
sertion in  the  translation :  and  add  here,  It  is  so  far  from  be- 
ing correct,  that  the  Pluralis  excellenticB,  (e.  g.  in  D^^biN^  d^jl^ 
B'^^ii'.a,  &c,)  is  formed  on  the  very  basis  that  the  Fiural  is  em- 
phatic, in  such  cases.  This  principle  extends  to  many  cases  of 
the  Hebrew  ;  e.  g.  Their  inward  part  is  ni^llTT  depravities^  i.e. 
very  depraved.  It  is  a  principle,  however,  which  no  grammari- 
an  has  yet  sufficiently  defined  and  established, 

§  170.  Abstract  words  not  of  course  emphatic^  when 
used  for  concrete  ones.  In  like  manner,  we  must  beware 
of  attaching  emphasis  to  an  abstract  word,  which  mere- 
ly stands  for  a  concrete  one.  Seme  learned  men  have 
done  this ;  and  even  Glass  himself  admits  that  it  may 
properly  be  done,  as  do  many  others,  who  have  follow- 
ed his  example.  But  they  have  neither  given  any  good 
reason  for  this,  nor  shewn  the  origin  or  cause  of  the 
pretended  emphasis  ;  so  that  it  seems  to  be  rather 
a  thing  which  they  wish,  than  one  which  they  can  in- 
telligibly teach.     The   true  ground  of  using   abstract 


RULES  RESPECTING    EMPHASIS.  87 

words  in  the  room  of  concrete  ones,  is  either/rojn  ne- 
cessity^ or  for  the  sake  of  perspicuity  ;  not  on  account  of 
Emphasis.  In  the  sacred  books,  the  necessity  of  it 
springs  from  the  Hebrew  dialect,  which  often  employs 
abstract  words  in  this  manner,  because  it  has  only  a 
few  concrete  ones.  The  mistake  of  the  interpreters 
in  question,  arises  from  the  infrequency  of  the  practice 
in  the  Latin,  and  in  their  own  vernacular  tongue.  But 
dissimilarity  of  idiom  does  not  constitute,  as  a  thing  of 
course,  any  real  emphasis.  The  ground  above  taken 
is  quite  clear  also,  from  another  circumstance,  viz.  that 
in  the  same  forms  of  expression,  abstracts  and  concretes 
are  commuted  for  each  other.  Comp.  Col.  1  :  13  and 
Matthew  3:17.  Also  Ephesians  5  :  8  and  4:18,  &c. 
(Morus,  p.  332.  XV.) 

fi 
§  171.  Emphasis  must  not  be  deduced  merely  from  ori- 
ental idioms.  In  the  sacred  books,  and  specially  in  the 
Hebraisms  of  the  New  Testament,  we  must  take  care 
not  to  seek  for  and  recognize  emphasis,  merely  in  the 
idiom  which  is  so  very  dissimilar  to  ours.  Many 
persons,  though  acquainted  with  the  Hebrew,  have  oft- 
en made  this  mistake.  But  nothing  is  more  fallacious. 
In  the  oriental  languages,  many  things  appear  hyperbo- 
lical,  (if  you  translate  them  literally,  that  is,  merely  by 
the  aid  of  common  Lexicons  and  etymology,)  which  are 
not  in  reality  hyperbolical.  E.  g.  In  Lamentations,  it  is 
said,  My  trouble  is  great  as  the  sea ;  which  is  simply 
equivalent  to  the  Latin  expression,  Malamea  sunt  maxi- 
ma,    (Morus,  p.  335.  XVI.) 

§  172.  How  to  discover  emphasis  in  doubtful  cases.  If 
there  be  no  adequate  testimony  to  shew  that  any  word 
has  a  constant  emphasis,  we  must  consult  usage.  And 
here  we  should  first  inquire,  whether  in  all  the  passages 
where  the  word  is  found,  emphasis  would  be  congru- 
ous. Next,  whether  in  the  same  passage  or  a  similar 
one,  another  word  may  be  substituted  in  the  room  of 
this,  which  other  contains  a  special  designation  ofinten* 


tS  RULES  RESPECTING   EMPHASIS. 

sity.  If  neither  of  these  be  the  case,  but  the  word  in 
question  may  be  commuted  for  others,  which  are  plain- 
ly unemphatic  ;  or  in  some  of  the  passages  where  the 
word  occurs,  a  special  designation  of  intensity  is  made, 
by  adding  some  other  word  for  this  purpose  ;  then 
there  is  no  emphasis  to  be  recognized  in  the  word  in 
question.  E.  g.  Some  have  attached  emphasis  to  ctno- 
xa^adoitiag,  in  Romans  8:  19;  but  in  Phil.  1:  20.  it 
would  be  incongruous.  There  it  is  used  as  a  synonyme 
with  iXnvdi^  (as  it  is  also  by  the  LXX,)  and  in  fact, 
commuted  with  it,  in  verse  22.  Nor  is  emphasis  al- 
ways attached  to  such  phrases  as  ^apuv  %aLQeLv  ;  (a) 
for  such  phrases  are  often  used,  when  another  word  is 
added  to  \n(\'\c:,^\e  intensity^  (e- g»  Matt.  2:  10.)  This 
would  be  useless  if  the}'  indicated  intensit}^  of  them- 
selves. ^ 

a)  But  in  Hebrew,  it  is  admitted  by  the  best  oriental  scholars, 
not  only  that  such  forms  as  b^I^pD  !:Nlp2  admit  of  emphasis,  but 
that  this  is  the  prevailing  usus  'loquend'i.  The  imitation  of  this, 
in  Greek,  may  consequently  be  emphatic. 

§  173.  Further  rules  to  discover  emphasis.  The  usual 
or  temporary  emphasis,  arising  from  the  affection  of  the 
speaker,  or  some  other  cause,  may  be  recognized  with- 
out difficulty,  by  the  following  mark  ;  viz.  if  the  ordi- 
nary signification  of  the  word  is  far  below  the  manifest 
intensity  of  the  affection  which  the  speaker  or  writer 
feels,  or  is  incompetent  to  describe  the  greatnes  of  the 
object.  If  emphasis  be  not  admitted,  in  such  cases,  the 
discourse  would  be  frigid ;  which  fault  is  certainly 
very  foreign  from  the  style  of  the  sacred  writers. 

§  174.  Continued,  Another  rule  for  finding  whether 
a  word  or  phrase  is  emphatic,  is  this.  If  the  usual 
force  of  the  word  or  phrase  would  give  a  frigid  mean- 
ing, when,  on  the  other  hand,  an  apt  one  would  arise, 
if  some  intensity  were  given  to  the  word,  there  is  a 
plain  necessity  of  emphasis ;  which  is  the  best  guide 
for  finding  it.     So  in  1  Cor.  4  :  3,  4,  avaKQiveiv  is  con- 


ilttLEfe  ilESiPECl'lKG    EMPHASIS.  89 

stantly  emphatic;  meaning  either  to  he  tried  by  the 
judgment  of  another^  or  to  take  to  one'^s  self  the  right 
of  trying  and  judging^  or,  to  have  the  right  of  judging^  or, 
to  he  able  rightly  to  judge.  But  if  you  translate  it  sim- 
ply to  judge^  a  frigid  jsense  would  be  given  to  it,  not  at 
all  adapted  to  the  context.  In  like  manner,  nvorvv  in 
Col.  1  :  4,  is  used,  as  the  context  shews,  to  denote 
the  constancy^  greatness^  or  fruitfulness  of  faith.  For 
Paul  was  not  necessitated  to  know,  by  report,  that 
the  Church  at  Colosse  had  simply  Chritian  faith, 
since  he  had  founded  that  Church.  So  in  Rom.  1  :  8, 
that  faith  must  have  been  special^  which  was  celebrated 
throughout  the  world.  Also  in  Matt.  4  :  2,  ^nfi^vaas 
must  imply  intensity,  from  the  circumstances  of  the 
case. 

§  175.  Emphasis  must  not  contradict  the  usus  loquendi. 
In  this  however,  the  usus  loquendi  is  not  to  be  neglected. 
It  must  be  so  far  consulted,  as  to  see  that  the  emphasis 
implies  nothing  repugnant  to  it. 


PART   11. 

CHAPTER   VIL 

MEANS    OF  HARMONIZING  APPARENT  DISCREPANCIES. 

[Keil,  5  102.    Beck,  pp.  192—194.] 

§  176.  If  two  passages  contradict  each  other^  the  text 
of  one  must  he  faulty.  If  it  could  be  plainly  shewn,  that 
two  passages  of  Scriptures  are  so  repugnant  to  each 
other,  that  no  method  of  conciliation  is  practicable,  it 
must  then  necessarily  follow,  that  one  of  the  readings  in 
the  usual  copies  must  be  faulty.  Consequently,  an  emen- 
dation of  the  text  must  be  sought.  Of  this  nature,  per- 
haps, is   the   passage   John,    19  :  14,    compared  with 


^0  MEANS  OF   HARMONIZING 

Matthew,  27:  45,  and  Mark  15:  25.  Also,  as  many- 
think,  Luke  3  :  36,  compared  with  Genesis  10:  24; 
thoagh  this  is  not  clear,  in  my  view.  Some  add  Mat- 
thew 27:  9,  compared  with  Zechariah  11:  12,13. 
(Morus,  Vol.  II.  p.  3.  I.) 

§  177.  If  the  text  of  both  he  genuine^  then  Gonciliation 
is  to  be  sought^  where  apparent  discrepancies  exist.  If  the 
text  of  both  passages  plainlj^  appears  to  be  genuine,  so 
that  it  cannot  fairly  be  questioned,  then  it  must  be  un- 
derstood, that  there  is  a  mere  appearance  of  inconsisten- 
cy :  which  should  be  removed,  and  the  passage  concili- 
ated by  a  proper  interpretation.  (Morus,  Vol.  II. 
p.  7.  II.) 

§  178.  Discrepancies  doctrinal  and  historic.  The  ap- 
pearance of  inconsistency  sometimes  occurs  in  passages 
of  a  doctrinal,  and  sometimes  of  a  historical  kind.  The 
writers  of  the  New  Testament  sometimes  appear  to  be 
at  variance  with  themselves  ;(a)  sometimes  with  each 
other  ;(6)  and  occasionally  with  the  writers  of  the  Old 
Testament.(c)  Many  writers  have  laboured  to  harmonize 
these  apparent  discrepancies ;  some  devoting  them- 
selves to  the  consideration  of  a  particular  class  of  them, 
and  others  treating  of  the  whole.  A  catalogue  of  these 
writers  may  be  found  in  Le  Long,  Pfaff,  Fabricius,  and 
others.     (Morus,  Vol.  II.  p.  8.) 

o)  E.  g.  1  Cor.  8:  1  comp.  verse  7.  (b)  E.  g.  Paul  as- 
serts that  a  man  is  justified  by  faith  and  not  by  works  ;  James, 
that  he  is  justified  not  by  faith  only,  but  also  by  works,  (c)  E.  g. 
In  many  passages  cited  from  the  Old  Testament,  by  the  writers 
Qf  the  New  Testament. 

§  179.  Causes  of  apparent  discrepancy  in  doctrinal  pas- 
sages. In  doctrinal  passages,  an  apparent  contradiction 
that  is  to  be  removed,  arises,  for  the  most  part,  either 
from  the  style  of  the  authors,  which  is  rather  of  the 
popular  kind,  than  that  of  nice  refinement ;  or  from  the 
genius  of  the  oriental  languages,  which  differs  so  wide- 
ly from  that  of  the  western  ones.  An  apparent  con- 
tradiction, in  respect  to  doctrines  plainly  taught,  (which 


APPARENT  DISCREPANCIES.  91 

has  often  been  objected  to  our  religion  by  impious  and 
profane  men,  e.  g.  Julian  in  Cyril's  works,  who  says, 
that  it  is  expressly  taught  there  is  but  one  God,  and  yet 
Matthew  xxviii.  ascribes  Divinity  to  three,)  is  to  be 
removed  by  theologians,  in  the  way  of  explaining 
things^  rather  than  words  merely;  and  so  comes  not  di- 
rectly wiihin  the  province  of  the  interpreter.  (Morus, 
Vol.  II.  p.  9.) 

§  180.  Method  of  harmonizing  apparent  doctrinal  dis- 
crepancies. The  method  of  harmonizing  doctrinal  pas- 
sages may  be  regulated  by  the  following  maxims.  An 
obscure  passage,  i.  e.  one  in  which  is  something  ambi- 
guous, or  unusual,  should  be  explained  in  accordance 
with  what  is  plain  and  without  any  ambiguity.(a) 
Again,  a  passage  in  which  a  doctrine  is  merely  touched, 
or  adverted  to,  is  to  be  explained  by  other  passages, 
which  present  plain  and  direct  exhibitions  of  it. (6) 

We  must  however,  be  careful  to  harmonize  apparent 
discrepancies,  if  it  can  be  done,  by  recourse  to  the  usus 
loquendi  ;  so  that  all  occasion  of  doubt  or  cavilling  may 
be  removed.  For  it  is  very  desirable,  that  the  usus  lo' 
quendi  should  justify  that  sense,  v/hich  we  put  on  any 
doubtful  passage,  from  having  compared  it  with  passages 
that  are  plain  and  clear.  (Morus,  Vol  II.  p.  9.  and  10.) 

(a)  E.  ^.  We  explain  all  antbropopathic  expressions  in  regard* 
to  God,  by  the  plain  truth  that  his  nature  is  spiritual. 

(6)  E.  g.  The  subject  of  justification  in  Rom.  lU.  is  design- 
edly treated  at  large  ;  of  the  resurrection,  in  1  Cor.  XV.  Such 
passages  are  called  classic,  (loci  classici,)  and  by  them  other  ex- 
pressions, which  simply  occur  obiter,  are  to  be  explained, 

181.  Continued,  It  is  very  important  to  remember, 
that  many  things  of  a  doctrinal  nature  are  simply  and 
absolutely  declared,  agreeably  to  common  usage  in  all 
languages,  which  still  have  only  a  relative  sense.  This 
may  be  accounted  for  from  the  fact,  that  there  are  parts 
of  religion  which  are  cornmonly  known  and  understood  ; 
therefore  such  parts  do  not  need  accurate  limitations. 
E.  g.  That  we  are  saved  byfaith^  is  one  of  the  elementa- 


92  MEANS  OF    HARMONIZING 

ry  principles,  of  the  Christian  religion.  The  sacred 
writers,  therefore,  do  not,  on  every  mention  of  any 
duty,  reniind  ws  of  this  principle  ;  as  they  expect  us  to 
keep  it  in  memory.  When  they  say,  therefore,  that 
almsgiving  is  acceptable  to  God,  they  expect  to  be  un- 
derstood as  meaning,  if  it  he  accompanied  by  faith.  In 
this  way  apparent  discrepancies  may  be  reconciled  ;  and 
the  reconciliation  becomes  the  more  probable,  as  the 
reason  for  it  can  be  given.     (Morus,  Vol.  II.  p.  11.) 

Apparent  discrepancies,  arising  from  oriental  style  or  manner 
of  expression,  ($  179.)  are  pretty  numerous.  E.  g.  Pluck  out  the 
eye  that  offends  thee  ;  It  is  easier  for  a  camel  to  go  through  the 
eye  of  a  needJe,  &:c  ;  To  follow  Christ,  one  must  hate  parents, 
&c,  Luke  14 :  26.  The  context,  passages  similar  as  to  the  sub- 
ject, the  nature  of  the  style,  the  subject  itself,  &c,  are  the  means 
of  finding  the  true  sense  of  such  places  ;  and  then  the  harmony  of 
them  with  other  passages  is  obvious.  (Morus,  Vol.  II.  pp. 
11-~14.) 

Apparent  discrepancies  between  various  writers,  or  between 
different  parts  of  the  same  author,  not  unfrequently  occur.  E.  g. 
Rom.  Ill,  and  James  II,  in  respect  to  justification.  The  mode 
of  conciliation  is  simply  to  obtain  a  complete  view  of  the  meaning 
of  each  writer.  It  will  then  be  seen,  for  example  in  this  case, 
that  Paul  is  arguing  against  those  who  would  establish  meritori' 
ows  justification  ;  James,  against  Antinomian  views  of  the  gospel. 
WorkSf  in  Paul's  epistle,  means  complete  obedience  to  the  law  ; 
in  James,  it  means  such  obedience  as  must  be  the  necessary  conse- 
quence of  Christian  faith.  The  object  of  both  Apostles  being 
fully  understood,  all  discrepancy  vanishes.  In  like  manner,  the 
advice  of  Paul  in  I  Cor.  VII,  respecting  matrimony,  is  only  pro 
tempore  ;  dictated  merely  by  the  present  exigencies  of  the  times  ; 
for  the  apostle,  in  many  other  places  of  his  writings,  has  express- 
ed a  different  sentiment.     (Morus,  pp.  14 — 17.) 

Similar  to  the  apparent  discrepancy  just  mentioned,  is  the 
case  where  different  predicates  are  apparently  asserted  of  the 
same  subject.  £.  g.  Rom,  3  :  20,  it  is  said  that  a  man  cannot 
be  justified  by  works;  but  in  2:13,  it  is  stated,  that  the 
jiov^iat  doers  of  the  law  shall  be  justified.  Here  one  verse  states 
the  rule  of  legal  justification  ;  the  other  asserts  that  no  man  can 
claim  it  on  the  ground  of  that  rule.  Again  where  we  are  said  to 
he  justified  byfaith^  the  meaning  is  that  we  receive  pardon  on  the 
ground  of  gratuity ;  but  justification.^  as  applied  to  the  doers  of 
the  law,  means  reward  on  the  ground  of  merit  or  perfect  obedi- 
ence.    (Morus,  Vol.  11.  p.  17.  VI.) 

Discrepancies  seem  to  exist,  at  times,  between  the  writers  of 
the  Old  Testament  and  the  New,  merely  from  the  different  man- 


APPAP.ENT  DISCREPANCIES.  93 

ner  in  which  they  express  themselves  on  the  same  subjects; 
when  this  is  rather  to  be  attributed  to  different  degrees  of  iight 
which  the  writers  had,  and  to  the  differences  in  the  eras,  man- 
ners, habits,  &c,  of  each.  E.  g.  The  subject  of  war  ;  of  loving 
enemies  ;  of  benevolence  to  the  Gentiles;  of  God's  equal  and  pa- 
ternal regard  to  them,  of  gratuitous  justification  ;  &c.  A  repre- 
sentation less  perfect,  in  the  Old  Testament,  need  not  be  under- 
stood as  contradicting  one  more  perfect  in  the  New.  (Moras, 
Vol.  II.  p.  18.  VI!.) 

Finally;  in  every  case  of  apparent  doctrinal  discrepancy,  the 
rule  to  guide  the  interpreter  is  simple  ;  viz.  Find  the  true  mean- 
ing of  each  writer  ;  take  every  thing  into  view,  which  the  prin- 
ciples of  interpreting  language  requires  ;  the  subject,  scope,  con- 
text, design,  age,  habits,  style,  object,  &c,  of  the  author  ;  and 
when  the  meaning  is  found  of  each  writer,  the  passages  may  be 
brought  together,  without  fear  of  any  real  discrepancy. 

§  182.  Origin  of  apparent  historical  discrepancies.  Ap- 
parent discrepancies  of  a  historical  nature,  originate 
from  a  difference  of  design  and  manner  in  narrating  the 
same  thing  ;  as  often  happens  in  the  Gospe-lc.  For  a 
diversity  of  design  varies  the  choice  of  circumstances. 
Many  circumstances  differ,  after  all,  in  nothing  important 
as  to  designating  the  ideas,  which  the  authors  in  com- 
mon mean  to  designate ;  and  oftentimes  they  may  be 
either  commuted  for  each  other,  or  omitted.  It  is  of 
no  importance,  sometimes,  whether  a  thing  be  asserted 
in  a  generic  or  specific  form.  Hence,  appearances  of 
discrepancy  have  frequently  arisen.  (Morus,  Vol.  II. 
p.  22.  IX.) 

§  183.  Continued.  But  far  more  frequently,  an  ap- 
pearance of  discrepancy  arises  from  the  mere  manner  of 
expression  ;  which  seems,  at  first  view,  to  imply  a  dif- 
ference in  the  things  described,  while  it  is  merely  a 
difference  in  the  mode  of  describing  them.  It  is  very 
evident,  that  the  best  and  most  careful  writers  do  not  al- 
ways exhibit  the  same  precise  and  accurate  method  in 
respect  to  the  names  of  things,  persons,  or  places  5(a) 
in  regard  to  numbers,(6)  dates, (c)  years,  &c.  Nor 
are  they  usually  blamed  for  this,  nor  ought  they  to  be. 
Hence,  where  several  names  of  the  same  object  exist^ 


94  MEANS  OF    HARMONIZING 

they  sometimes  exhibit    one,    and   sometimes  another. 

In  regard  to  the  manner  of  expressing  time,  places,  and 

numbers,    sometimes  they  tise  the  more  vulgar  and  in- 

\   distinct  method,  and  sometimes  the  more  nice  and  accu- 

jp'ate  one.  in  designating  time, they  vary.  They  sometimes 

/  put  genus  for  species,  and  vice  versa.     Examples  of  such 

a  nature  occur  in  common  histories ;  and  also  in  the 

Gospels. 
a)  E.  g.  Mat.  17  :  14,  comp.  Luke  9:  38.     Gadarene  and  Ger- 

gasene,    Matt.  8 :    28,    comp.    with    Mark  5.    2.      Matt.  5.1' 

comp.  Luke    6:    17.     6)  Matt.    27:    44.    comp.    Luke    23:39. 

Matt.  8:    5—9  comp.  Luke  7:1—10.     Matt.    8:   28.    comp. 

Mark  5  ;  2.     Acts  7:14  comp.  Gen.  46  :  27.     Acts  7  :  6  comp. 

Gal.  3  ;  17.     c)  Luke  2;  2.  comp.  with  history  of  Syrian  Pro- 

consuls. 

§  184.  We  should  be  conversant  with  conciliations  of 
passages  in  the  best  classic  authors.  With  these  usages  in 
vfriting  history,  we  ought  to  be  well  acquainted,  either 
by  our  own  study  of  the  classics,  or  from  the  remarks 
of  skilful  interpreters  ;  e.  g.  Perizonius  in  Animadverss. 
hist,  et  al.  lib. ;  Duker  on  Livy  ;  Wesseling  on  Herodotus 
and  Diodorus.  An  acquaintance  with  these,  will  enable 
us  promptly  to  obtain  aid  from  them,  when  it  is  needed, 
for  harmonizing  passages,  which  seem  to  disagree  ;  for 
it  is  plain,  that  the  difficulty  of  harmonizing  passages 
arises,  for  the  most  part,  from  want  of  skill  in  this  ex- 
ercise.    (Morus,  Vol.  II.  p.  28.  XIIL) 

§  185.  Historical  Facts  not  to  be  confounded  because  of 
a  slight  similitude  ;  nor  to  be  represented  as  different^  on 
account  of  some  slight  discrepancy.  In  historic  discrepan- 
cies, we  must  guard  against  confounding  things  which 
really  ditfer,  merely  because  they  have  some  similitude  ; 
or  deducing  discrepancies  thence,  as  has  often  happen- 
ed, in  the  interpretation  of  profane  authors.  On  the 
other  hand,  we  must  not  rashly  multiply  facts  because 
there  are  some  slight  discrepancies  in  the  narration  of 
them.  The  reading  of  history,  and  of  good  commen- 
taries upon  different  authors,  is  very  important  to  assist 
one  here. 


APPARENT  DISCREPANCIES.  95 

On  the  subject  of  harmonizing  the  narrations  contained  in  the 
Gospels,  it  is  difficult  to  say  any  thing  here,  which  will  give  even 
a  faint  representation  of  the  efforts  that  have  been  made.  Sever- 
al hundred  harmonies  have  been  published.  Some  have  chosen 
one  Gospel  as  exhibiting  the  regular  order  of  time,  and  conform- 
ed the  rest  to  it ;  others  have  rejected  the  supposition  of  perfect 
chronological  order  in  any.  Some  have  made  the  number  of 
facts  related  as  small  as  possible,  and  forced  the  language  to  a 
harmony  ;  others,  have  multiplied  the  number  of  facts,  so  that 
every  narration  comprising  a  single  circumstance  of  discrepancy 
from  others,  has  been  supposed  to  contain  a  history  of  a  similar  but 
still  of  a  separate  fact.  Some  have  supposed  the  public  ministry  of 
Christ  to  have  continued  for  three  years  ;  others  for  more  than 
seven. 

Dispute  about  the  sources  of  the  Gospels  has  been  multiplied 
almost  without  bounds,  among  the  German  critics.     By  different 
writers,  each  of  the  first  three  Evangelists  has  been  considered  as 
the  source  of  the  rest ;  while  others  allow  that  there  are  two  in- 
dependent writers,  and   the  rest   are  compilers.     Many   others 
suppose  that  original  Hebrew,   or  rather  Syro-Chaldaic  docu- 
ments existed  in  writing,  from  which  the  first  three  evangelists 
drew  in  common.     Hence  their  resemblance  to  each  other  in  re- 
spect to  diction.     But  different  copies  of  sucli' documents,  they 
suppose,  were  used  by  the  Evangelists,  which  had  been   interpo- 
lated or  augmented.     Hence  their  discrepancies.     Some  assert 
a  perfect  harmony  between  the  Evangelists  even  in  the  minutest 
circumstances ;    while    others    maintain    discrepancies,    which 
amount  to  absolute  contradictions. — Where  shall  the  young  in- 
terpreter go,  to  find  any  refuge  from  such  a  chaos  of  doubts  and 
difficulties,  as  are  here  presented?  If  I  may  venture  to  express 
an  opinion,  which  is  not  the  mere  result  of  speculation,  I  would 
say  ;  Let  him  go  to  the  diligent,  thorough,  repeated  study  of  the 
gospels,  with  a  candid  mind,  united  to  a  life  of  prayer  and  faith. 
Let  him  carry  with  him  to  this  study,  a  fundamental  knowledge 
of  the  nature  of  language,  that  he  may  not  be  embarrassed  with 
the  mere  forms  of  words.     I  will  venture  to  add,  that  he  will  find 
it  necessary  to  believe  with  Jerome,  that  the  Scripture  consists  in 
the  sense  of  a  passage^  and  not  in  the  words  only ;  which  are  the 
mere  costume  of  the  sense.     Notions  of  I'crfea/inspiration  may  be, 
and''often  have  been  such,  as  to  render  the  conciliation    of  the 
Evangelists  a  desperate   undertaking.     That  notion,  which  at- 
taches absolute  perfection  to  ihe  form  of  language^  as  well  as  to 
the  sense  which  it  conveys,  makes  the  reconciliation  of  them  im- 
possible.    In  some  cases,  two,  three,  or  even  the   four  Evange- 
lists, relate  the  same  thing  in  different  words.    Now  if  the  form 
of  the  words  in  one  is  absolutely  perfect^  what  is  to  be  said  of 


96  MEANS   OF    HARMONIZING 

the  other  thrfee,  who  have  adopted  different  forms  ?  And  if  the 
form  of  a  narration  in  Luke,  with  two,  three,  or  more  circum- 
stances interwoven  is  absolutely  perfect,  what  become  of  the 
narrations  in  Matthew  and  Mark,  where  one,  or  more  of  these 
circumstances  are  omitted  ? 

.  It  is  a  fact  whicli  admits  of  no  doubt,  that,the  sacred  writers 
differ  from  each  other  as  much, in  respect  to  the  mode  of  writing, 
as  profane  authors.  The  proper  question  always  is.  What  is  the 
meanings  which  they  design  to  convey  r  What  is  their  principal 
or  special  object,  in  conveying  it  ?  These  questions  being  an- 
swered, it  matters  not  in  what  garb  this  meaiiing  is  clad  ;  nor 
whether  more  or  fewer  circumstances  accompany  it,  that  are  not 
essential  to  the  main  point. 

Considerations  of  this  nature  will  help  to  remove  the  apparent 
discrepancies  of  the  Gospels  ;  as  they  are  now  presented  to  us. 
And  as  to  speculations  about  the  origin  of  them,  very  little  terra 
firma  has  yet  been  won,  by  all  the  adventures  that  have  been  un- 
dertaken. 

The  Student  may  read  with  some  profit,  Morus,  Vol.  II.  pp. 
24 — 49;  and  many  of  Newcome's  Notes,  printed  at  the  end  of 
his  Harmony,  are  the  result  of  good  sense  joined  with  much  criti- 
cal experience. 

§  186.  Doubtful  passages  to  he  interpreted  by  plain  ones. 
In  harmonizing  passages,  it  is  very  inoportant  to  deter- 
mine which  is  to  be  accommodated  to  the  other.  We 
ought  to  have  some  rule  here,  lest  we  should  wander 
from  our  way.  The  rule  is  thfs ;  if  one  passage  be 
plain  and  accurately  expressed,  so  as  to  admit  of  no 
doubt,  it  cannot  admit  of  any  accommodation.  The 
doubtful  one  must  be  accommodated,  then,  to  the  plain 
one. 

§  187.  A  perfect  Harmony  not  to  he  expected.  After 
all,  I  should  admit,  with  PfaiT,  that  a  perfect  Harmony 
of  the  Gospels  can  hardly  be  made  by  rule.  Conjec- 
ture must  sometimes  be  applied  to  the  rules  of  harmo- 
nizing, and  to  the  use  of  them  in  particular  cases.  But 
A  it  is  well  to  observe  here,  that  the  subject  respects 
merely  occasional  historical  facts;  of  which  one  may 
be  ignorant,  without  endangering  his  salvation.  Nay, 
better  submit  to  be  ignorant  here,  than  to  torture  one's 
brain  to  find  out  what  is  not  of  essential  importance. 


ON  TRANLATING  THE  SCRIPTURES.  97 


PART  III. 

ON  TRANSLATING    THE    SCRIPTURES. 

§  188.  An  interpreter  should  not  only  understand  the 
Scriptures^  but  be  able  to  explain  thetn  well^  so  as  to  give 
an  exact  delineation  of  the  original.  An  interpreter 
should  not  only  possess  a  thorough  understanding  of  the 
Scriptures,  but  also  the  faculty  of  interpreting  and  ex- 
plaining them  well.  On  this  subject,  it  may  be  proper 
to  say  a  few  things. 

The  object  of  interpretation  is  to  give  the  sense  of 
an  author,  without  addition,  diminution,  or  change.  Aver- 
sion ought  to  be  an  exact  image  of  the  original  or  arche- 
type, in  which  image  nothing  should  be  drawn  either 
greater  or  less,  better  or  worse,  than  the  original ;  but  so 
composed  that  it  might  be  acknowledged  as  another  ori- 
ginal itself.  It  follows,  that  a  translator  should  use  those 
words,  and  those  only,  which  clearly  express  a// ^/ie  mean- 
ing of  the  author.^  and  in  the  same  manner  as  the  aiithor. 
But  this  needs  illustration. 

§  189.  The  words  of  the  version  ought  to  correspond  as 
exactly  as  possible  to  those  of  the  original.  First,  as  the 
same  meaning  must  be  conveyed,  those  words  are  to  be 
selected,  the  force  of  which  plainly  corresponds  to  that 
of  the  original,  and  which  are  not  ambiguous,  but  of  a 
plain  and  established  meaning,  among  those  for  whom 
the  translation  is  made.  Those  words  are  to  be  pre- 
ferred, (if  such  can  be  found,)  which  correspond  alto- 
gether with  the  words  of  the  author,  in  respect  to 
etymology,  tropical  use,  and  construction.  But  great 
caution  is  necessary  here,  in  judging  whether  the  usage 


98  ON  TRANSLATING   THE    SCRIPTURES. 

of  the  two  languages  agrees.  Otherwise  no  version  c^n 
be  made,  which  can  be  well  understood  by  those  who 
are  ignorant  of  the  original  language  ;  but  rather  an 
obscuration  of  the  author,  and  not  unfrequently  a  per- 
version of  him.  For  men  will  understand  the  words  of 
a  Latin  version,  according  to  the  Latin  usus  loquendi^ 
(and  so  of  a  German  translation  ;)  when  they  ought  to 
be  understood,  if  the  rule  above  be  violated,  according 
to  the  Greek  or  Hebrew  idiom.  Or  perhaps  the  un- 
learned reader  will  not  understand  them  at  all,  although 
from  the  habit  of  hearing  and  using  the  words,  he  may 
think  he  understands  them.  A  frequent  case,  indeed, 
among  the  unlearned  ;  and  1  may  add,  among  their 
teachers  also  ! 

§  190.  When  one  cannot  translate  ad  verhum^  he  must 
translate  ad  sensum.  But  if  appropriate  words,  as  above 
described,  cannot  be  selected,  on  account  of  the  differ- 
ence of  idiom  between  the  two  languages,  (the  original, 
and  that  of  the  translator,)  which  often  express  the 
same  things  by  words  that  do  not  correspond  in  their 
etymology  or  their  proper  signification,  (specially  is  this 
the  case  with  the  oriental  and  occidental  languages,  so 
that  a  literal  translation  of  the  former  would  be  often 
unintelligible  in  the  latter,)  then  we  must  relinquish 
the  design  of  translating  ad  verbum^  and  content  our- 
selves with  merely  giving  the  sense  of  the  original, 
plainly  designated. 

§  191.  A  knowledge  of  Hebrew  as  well  as  Greek^  neces- 
sary to  translate  the  New  Testament.  This  can  be  ef- 
fected only  by  one,  who  has  an  accurate  knowledge  of 
both  languages.  To  accomplish  this  in  respect  to  the 
New  Testament,  a  man,  besides  the  knowledge  of  his 
vernacular  tongue,  must  have  an  accurate  knowledge  of 
both  Greek  and  Hebrew.  This  is  necessary,  not  only- 
to  understand  the  original,  but  to  judge  of  what  is  pe- 
culiar to  each  language,  and  to  express  the  sense  of  the 
original,  in  a  manner  adapted  to  the  genius  of  his  own 
language. 


ON  TRANSLATING    THE    SCKIPTURES.  99 

§  192.  Cases  where  we  must  adhere  to  the  mode  of  trans- 
lating ad  verbum.  But  various  causes  operate,  to  pre- 
vent a  translator  from  strictly  following  the  rule  in 
§  190.  For  Jirst^  when  the  form  and  manner  of  the 
Greek  words  has  such  a  connexion  with  the  things  sig- 
nitied,  and  the  method  of  arguing,  that  those  things 
cannot  he  well  understood,  nor  the  argument  proceed 
well,  if  a  translation  ad  verbum  he  not  made,  then  we 
must  sacrifice  the  idiom  of  our  own  language,  and  ad- 
here to  that  of  the  Greek.  This  frequently  happens, 
in  respect  to  the  epistles  of  Paul ;  e.  g.  2  Cor.  III.  in  re- 
gard to  the  words  y^a^fAarog  and  nvev^arogj  also  do^rig  ; 
add  Gal.  3  :  16  ;  and  m  respect  to  allegories,  John  X. 

§  193.  Continued,  Antithesis,  Paronomasia,  and  the 
like  figures  of  speech,  also  require  a  modification  of  the 
rule  in  §  190.  For  the  grace  and  beauty  of  these 
perish,  when  the  language  is  changed.  Paul  has  many 
of  these  figures.  But  they  cannot  always  be  preserved; 
as  another  language  will  not  always  admit  them.  E.  g. 
in  Matt.  16:  18.  nexQog  and  ittrQa^  the  paronomasia 
can  be  preserved  in  Latin,  but  not  m  English. 

§  194.  Continued.  Another  class  of  words,  which 
must  be  literally  rendered,  are  those,  for  which  no 
equivalent  Ones  can  be  found,  in  the  language  of  the 
translator,  so  as  fully  and  unambiguously  to  express 
the  idea.  E.  g.  the  word  fcoi? ;  and  others,  as  nioxig, 
f-uravoca,  &;c. 

§  193.  Continued,  In  very  difficult  and  doubtful  passa- 
ges, also,  a  literal  translation  must  be  given,  because  a 
version  ad  sensum  would  be  assuming  that  one  definitely 
understood  the  real  meaning  of  the  passage.  This 
might  do  in  a  commentary,  but  not  in  a  translation. 
With  propriety,  says  Castalio,  on  1  Pet.  4:  6,  "This 
1  do  not  understand  ;  therefore  I  translate  it  ad  verbum, 

§  196.  In  translating^  we  ought  to  lean  towards  our  own 
vernacular  idiom.  A  good  acquaintance  with  these  maxims 


106  ON  TRANSLATING    THE   SCRIPTURES. 

of  translation,  specially  a  practical  acquaintance,  will 
enable  any  one  to  judge  whether  a  version  has  pre- 
served the  right  method  in  regard  to  purity  of  language, 
or  introduced  too  many  of  the  idioms  of  the  original. 
As  versions,  however,  are  not  made  for  the  learned, 
who  can  read  the  original,  but  for  others,  and  specially 
for  the  common  people,  it  is  better  to  incline  to  the  idi- 
om of  our  vernacular  tongue,  (even  in  cases  where 
you  might  with  some  propriety  adhere  to  the  original 
idiom,)  for  the  sake  of  rendering  the  translation  more 
intelligible.  It  was  well  said  by  Jerome  to  Pammachius, 
wh<»n  speaking  of  the  best  mode  of  interpretation,  ''  Let 
others  hunt  ?ii\er  syllables  and  letters ;  do  you  seek  for 
the  sense." 


APPENDIX. 

MORUS  ON  TRANSLATION. 

Extract  translated  from  a  Dissertation  of  Dr,  Morus^ 
late  Professor  of  Theology  in  the  Univerity  of  Leipsick^ 
entitled  de  discrimine  sensus  et  significationis  in  inter- 
PRFTANDo,  and  contained  in  his  Dissertationes  theol.  et. 
philol.    VoL  I.  JVo,  IL^ 

To  the  above  rules  of  Ernesti,  the  object  of  which  is  to  guide 
the  translator,  in  making  a  version  of  the  original  Scriptures  in- 
to his  own  vernacular  language,  I  have  thought  it  would  he  ac- 
ceptable and  useful  to  those  for  whom  this  little  volume  of  the 
Elements  of  Hermeneutics  is  designed,  to  subjoin  an  extract  from 
the  dissertation  of  Morus  just  mentioned,  which  appears  to  be 
very  judicious  and  instructive.  To  the  business  of  teaching  Her- 
meneutics, Morus  was  peculiarly  attached  and  devoted  ;  and 
few  men  have  understood  it  better,  or  left  behind  them  more  use- 
ful precepts,  on  this  interesting  subject.  Equally  removed  from 
the  recent  latitudinarianism  of  many  German  interpreters,  and 


MORUS  ON  TRANSLATION.  101 

from  the  mystic  and  technical  method  of  the  older  interpreters, 
he  formed  and  nurtured  a  school,  which  has  produced  great  dnd 
lasting  influence  upon  the  science  of  interpretation ;  and  the 
principles  of  which,  for  the  most  part,  must  commend  them- 
selves at  once,  when  well  understood,  to  every  intelligent  and 
unbiassed  mind. 

The  dissertation  in  question  commences,  with  pointing  out  the 
impossibility  of  translating  ad  verbum  out  of  one  language  into 
another,  in  every  case  that  ooay  occur.  The  reason  of  this  is 
grounded  in  the  different  modes  in  which  men  of  different  nations 
view  the  same  objects,  and  express  themselves  in  respect  to  them. 
The  age  in  which  writers  live,  their  different  manners,  customs, 
culture,  temper,  manner  of  life,  knowledge,  &c,  all  concur  in 
producing  these  differences.  In  consequence  of  the  operation  of 
causes  so  diverse,  there  is  in  one  language  much  of  rude  antiqui- 
ty, in  another  a  high  or  a  partial  state  of  cultivation  ;  in  one, 
the  connexions  and  transitions  are  circuitous,  in  another,  short 
and  easy ;  in  one  ellipsis  abounds,  in  another  it  is  unfrequent ; 
one  is  profuse  in  allegories  and  tropes,  another,  dry  and  jejune  in 
expression  ;  one  abounds  with  equivocal  and  indefined  phraseolo- 
gy, another,  with  definite  and  certain  words ;  the  one  is  fitted 
for  expression  in  respect  to  the  arts  and  sciences,  the  other,  des- 
titute of  such  means  of  expression  ;  the  one  is  copious,  the  other 
furnished  with  a  scanty  stock  of  words. 

In  consequence  of  these  diversities,  and  the  differences  of  idiom 
which  spring  out  of  them,  it  becomes  impossible  always  to 
translate  ad  verbum  from  the  one  to  the  other.  In  such  cases, 
Morusjustlj^  contends,  that  the  translator,  abandoning  a  literal 
version,  should  aim  at  exactly  communicating  the  sense,  E.  g. 
the  literal  translation  of  xaxw?  ^X^f'V  is  to  have  badly ;  but  what 
idea  could  an  English  reader  attach  to  this  translation  ?  Leaving 
then  the  version  ad  verbum^  we  must  translate  it,  to  be  sicky  which 
conveys  the  exact  sense  of  the  Greek  phrase,  in  an  intelligible 
form.  And  this  instance  may  serve  to  illustrate  what  iVforus 
means,  by  the  phrase,  difference  between  the  signification  and  the 
sense  of  words.  The  former  is  the  literal  and  primary  meaning 
of  the  words,  simply  considered ;  the  sense^  is  the  idea  conveyed 
by  the  words,  in  the  phrase,  or  in  the  connexion  where  they  stand. 

What  is  said  of  words  may  also  be  applied  to  phrases  and 
sentences,  for  the  same  reasons,  and  from  the  same  causes,  la 
all  these  cases,  where  the  sense  cannot  be  given  by  a  literal 
translation,  we  must  phoose  other  words  which  will  designate  it ; 
and  where  particular^  words  are  wanting  in  "our  own  language  to 
do  this,  we  must  have  recourse  to  circumlocution. 

Having  discussed  these  principles  of  translating,  Morus  pro- 
ceeds to  descant  upon  the  method  of  applying  them  to  practice. 
As  this  subject  is  a  matter  of  importance  to  all,  who  are  to  ex- 
9* 


102  MORUS  ON  TRANSLATION. 

pound  the  word  of  God  in  their  own  vernacular  tongue,  I  shall 
here  present  it,  in  a  translation  oi'the  author's  words. 

\  It  is  proper  here,  to  point  out  the  duty  of  the  inter- 
preter, in  reference  to  the  above  principles.  In  regard 
to  the  first  case,  namely,  where  we  abandon  a  literal 
version,  and  use  a  word  which  will  convey  the  sense  of 
the  original,  [  may  say,  in  general,  that  the  word  substi- 
tuted should  approximate  as  nearly  as  possible,  in  its 
signification,  to  that  of  the  original  word  which  it  repre- 
sents. On  accuracy  of  this  kind,  depends,  in  a  high  de- 
gree, the  excellence  of  any  version. 

But,  as  it  rarely  suffices  to  give  merely  general  di- 
rections, I  will  descend  to  particulars.  A  version,  then, 
should  exhibit  a  trope,  where  the  original  does,  wheth- 
er it  be  used  for  the  sake  of  ornament,  or  variety  ;  an 
energetic  word,  where  there  is  one  in  the  original. 
Let  the  translator  avoid  tropes,  where  the  diction  of 
the  original  is  not  figurative  ;  let  him  avoid  technical 
expressions,  where  those  of  common  life  should  be  used, 
e.  g.  Tilatov  should  not  be  rendered  perfection^  but  pro- 
bity^ uprightness.  Let  him  not  commute  genus  for  spe- 
cies; nor  antecedent  for  consequent.  In  respect  to 
words  which  depend  on  an  excited  state  of  mind,  such 
as  reproachful  terms,  and  those  of  complaint,  lamenta- 
tion, and  indignation;  also  proverbs,  and  proverbial 
phrases  ;  let  him  compare  these  most  carefully  with  the 
practice  of  common  life  ;  and  what  men  are  wont  to 
say  on  such  occasions,  let  him  express  in  his  version, 
and  not  rest  satisfied  with  some  kind  of  general  meaning, 
nor  make  a  version  which  is  cramped  by  its  diction. 
In  general,  let  him  take  care  to  form  a  right  estimate 
of  subjects  from  the  nature  ©f  the  predicates  attached 
to  them  5  which  is  a  matter  of  great  importance,  where 
there  is  a  departure  from  a  literal  version.  It  will  also 
afford  an  antidote  against  negligence  and  error. 

It  is  sufficient  to  have  given  these  few  hints ;  and  he 
who  wishes  for  more  accurate  knowledge  of  the  laws 
of  translating,  must  inquire  into  the  grounds  or  reasons 


MORUS  ON  TRANSLATION.  103 

of  these  laws.  These  reasons  are,  the  desire  to  translate 
closely  and  not  paraphrastically  ;  a  wish  to  give  an  ex- 
act idea  of  the  thing  designated  by  the  original  words, 
so  that  the  reader  may  understand  it ;  the  necessity  of 
exhibiting  the  external  beauty  of  the  original  diction  ; 
and  the  design  of  so  exhibiting  the  writer's  thoughts  in 
our  own  language,  as  to  make  it  apparent,  that  if  the 
writer  himself  had  used  our  language,  he  would  have 
expressed  this  proverb,  that  exclamation,  that  formula 
of  speech,  just  as  the  translator  has  done. 

In  regard  to  the  second  case,  viz,  where  circumlocu- 
tion is  to  be  employed,  one  rule  may  be  given  to  guide 
the  translator.  Let  him  use  words,  if  possible,  which 
do  not  express  entirely  an  idea  that  is  composed  of  many 
parts  in  the  original,  and  some  of  which  are  not  desig- 
nated exactly  in  the  passage  which  is  translated  ;  but 
let  him  choose  terms,  ivhich  are  as  exactly  equivalent  to 
the  original  as  possible.  Where  doubt  may  hang  over 
the  expression,  he  may  explain  it  by  notes  ;  but  he 
should  not  be  blamed  for  not  expressing  definitely  in  a 
translation,  what  is  indefinite  in  the  original  ;  and  while 
he  avoids  doing  this,  he  cannot  be  accused  of  obtruding 
his  own  views  upon  the  author  whom  he  translates. 

Thus  far  in  respect  to  translating  ad  sensum  rather 
than  ad  verbmn^  when  single  words  are  to  be  explained 
or  translated.  Let  us  come  now  to  sentences  and  pro- 
positions ;  in  regard  to  which,  when  they  cannot  be 
literally  translated  without  obscuring  instead  of  illus- 
trating the  sense,  we  must,  in  like  manner  as  before  de- 
scribed, substitute  the  meaning  of  the  words  instead  of 
the  words  themselves.  In  merely  explaining  a  passage, 
which  contains  the  sign  of  some  particular  thing,  the 
interpreter  may  substitute  the  thing  signified  for  the 
sign  of  it.  E.  g.  when  God  is  said  to  come  from  heaven^ 
an  interpreter  in  merely  explaining,  may  say.  This 
means  God  as  performing  some  illustrious  work^  or  doing 
any  thing  in  general  ;  or  God  as  taking  cognizance  of  any 
things  or  as  propitious^  or  unpropitious^  just  as  the  context 
requires.     Or  when  Christ  is  presented  as  sitting  at  the 


104  MORUS    ON  TRANSLATION. 

right  hand  of  God^  the  meaning  is,  that  Christ  is  partici- 
pating in  divine  sovereignty.  So  when,  in  the  oriental 
writers,  the  sun  is  represented  as  darkened,  the  moon 
obscured,  and  the  stars  as  shaken,  these  are  images  of 
distressing  times ;  and  therefore,  when  it  is  said  that 
these  things  will  happen,  the  simple  meaning  is,  that 
times  of  great  distress  will  follow,  in  which,  as  it  were, 
all  nature  seems  to  threaten  ruin.  To  this  class  of 
passages,  moreover,  belong  all  those,  in  uhich  God,  as 
future  judge,  is  represented  as  visible;  the  forms  of 
speech  being  taken  from  the  customs  of  men.  The 
meaning  of  such  passages  is,  that  God  will  render  to  eve- 
ry  one  according  to  his  deeds^  as  it  is  plainly  expressed  in 
Matt.  16  :  27. 

In  the  mere  explanation  of  these  formulas  of  language, 
every  one  sees  that  the  sense  is  to  be  given  ;  but  our 
translator  has  a  work  of  more  ditBculty.  For  where 
the  object  of  enumerating  many  signs  of  the  nature  de- 
scribed above,  is  to  render  the  description  more  vivid 
and  impressive,  (as  in  Matt.  24  :  29,  30,31.  Joel  3:1. 
Dan.  7  :  9.)  every  thing  must  be  closely  translated. 
The  translator  would  mutilate  the  diction  of  the  author, 
if  he  should  abridge  the  description  and  give  only  the 
general  meaning  ;  for  it  was  not  the  design  of  the  wri- 
ter, merely  to  present  to  the  mind  the  thing  summarily 
and  literally  declared,  but  as  it  were,  to  place  it  before 
the  eyes  in  a  picture  or  painting  of  it.  For  if  the  ver- 
sion, by  preserving  these  special  traits,  is  not  liable  to 
produce  an  erroneous  impression  in  the  reader's  mind, 
but  every  one  who  reads  will  easily  understand  that  the 
whole  is  to  be  considered  as  figurative  expression,  (as 
those  things  are,  which  are  spoken  of  God  avdQMiio- 
nadcag,)  then  there  is  no  good  reason  why  the  version 
should  be  changed  into  a  paraphrase  or  explanation. 
Who  would  doubt,  or  be  at  loss,  what  was  meant,  if 
men,  in  a  state  of  suffering  and  wretchedness,  should  be 
described  as  approaching  the  throne  of  God,  for  the 
purpose  of  supplication?  But  if  a  translation,  as  it 
stands  in  our  vernacular  tongue  to  be  read  by  the  un- 


5I0RUS  ON  TRANSLATION.  105 

learned,  necessarily  leads  to  wrong  views  of  the  senti- 
ments of  the  author,  by  being  literal  ;  or  communicates  a 
sentiment  opposite  to  his ;  or  makes  no  sense  ;  1  see  oo 
reason  why  we  should  fear  to  substitute  the  sense  instead 
of  the  literal  signification  o(  the  words;  specially  when 
an  argument  follows,  which  does  not  depend  on  the 
wo7^ds  but  on  the  sense^  and  which  no  one  can  understand, 
who  does  not  attend  to  the  sense  rather  than  the  words. 
Of  this  nature  are  such  expressions  as  making  interces- 
sion for  men;  sitting  at  the  right  hand  of  the  king; 
Christy  who  was  rich^  becoming  poor  that  men  might  be 
made  rich  ;  Christ  being  received  into  the  heavens^  &c  ; 
which  last  phrase  clearly  means,  to  be  most  exalted^  to 
have  supreme  dominion.  Had  some  critics  understood 
this,  they  might  have  spared  themselves  the  trouble  of 
inquiring,  whether  Christ  contains  the  heavens,  or  the 
heavens  him;  nor  would  they  have  thought  of  the  ma- 
jesty of  Christ  as  suffering  degradation,  by  being  includ- 
ed in  a  place  ;  nor  would  Beza  have  written  such  a 
note  as  he  has,  on  this  subject.  The  meanings  the 
meaning  only  is  to  be  sought  for  ;  and  not  the  mere  lite- 
ral signification  of  the  words. 

In  other  cases,  what  the  sacred  writers  have  applied 
only  to  a  part  or  species,  interpreters  have  sometimes 
applied  to  the  whole,  or  the  genus ;  and  vice  versa. 
Contemplated  in  the  light  where  they  have  placed  it, 
the  thing  appears  obscure,  or  difficult,  or  as  needing  to 
be  softened  down ;  but  in  the  other  light,  it  is  plain, 
easy,  and  accurately  described.  What  David,  in  a 
certain  place,  imprecates  upon  his  enemies,  (and  there- 
fore the  enemies  of  Christ)  viz,  that  their  habitation 
might  be  desolate  and  deserted^  Peter  applies  to  Judas 
the  betrayer  of  Christ,  and  declares  that  it  happened  to 
him.  (Acts,  1  :  20.)  But  if  a  literal  application  of  it  is  to 
be  made  to  David's  enemies,  it  is  not  to  be  applied,  iu 
the  same  sense  in  which  it  is  to  Judas.  How  will  it  be 
shewn,  that  the  habitation  of  Judas  became  desolate 
and  deserted?  Surely  violence  must  be  done  to  the  pas- 
sage, if  any   one  determines  to  understand  it  literally. 


106  MORUS   ON    TRANSLATION. 

We  rnay,  therefore,  see  whether  the  passage  cannot  be 
translated  ad  sensum,  E.  g".  if  in  uttering  an  imprecation 
against  one,  we  say,  let  his  house  become  desolate, 
our  meaning  is,  in  general,  that  he  may  be  erAirpated^ 
thai  he  may  utterly  perish.  Many  imprecations  are  of 
this  nature,  that  the  object  of  them  is  evil  in  general,  by 
which  some  one  is  to  be  overwhelmed  or  crushed  ;  and 
to  the  mere  form  of  the  words  themselves  we  are  not 
scrupulously  to  adhere.  For  the  language  of  impreca- 
tion is  of  such  a  nature,  that  it  designates,  by  its  vehe- 
mence or  moderation,  the  more  vehement  or  moderate 
affection  of  the  mind,  and  also  the  weight  or  lightness, 
the  abundance  or  fewness,  of  the  evils  which  are  to  be 
inflicted. 

Similar  to  the  imprecations,  of  which  I  have  just  been 
speaking,  is  that  of  wishing  that  any  one  may  he  extirpat- 
ed.^ or,  to  express  it  rhetorically,  that  his  house  may  be 
deserted;  which  is  the  image  of  destruction  or  extirpa- 
tion. This  expression,  logically  considered,  means  a 
species  of  destruction  ,•  and  in  the  language  of  common 
life,  it  would  stand  for  an  example  of  destruction.  If 
now  the  words  above  applied  to  Judas  are  considered 
as  simpl}^  designating  the  idea.  Let  him  perish^  and  are 
urged  no  farther,  all  this  most  truly  happened  to  Ju- 
das ;  and  this  entirely  agrees  with  the  sense  put  upon 
the  words,  in  Peter's  discourse.  For,  as  Peter  argues, 
if  Judas  has  perished,  there  is  need  of  a  successor  in 
his  office.  But  if  the  passage  be  literally  understood, 
the  conclusion  is  not  valid  ;  for  it  would  not  follow,  that 
because  the  house  of  Judas  is  deserted,  a  successor  to 
his  office  is  needed.  We  may  conclude,  therefore,  that 
Peter  cites  one  of  the  many  imprecations  contained  in 
a  long  poem,  not  because  this  imprecation  only  is  to  be 
regarded  literatim  et  syllabatim^  but  merely  to  shew  to 
whom  all  imprecations  of  that  nature  attach,  and  to 
whom  they  may  be  referred. 

But  still  further  to  confirm  this  exegesis;  does  Paul, 
I  would  ask,  when  he  cites  a  part  of  the  imprecations  in 
the    same    poem,    insist  upon    and    urge    the    literal 


MORUS   ON   TRANSLATION.  107 

meaning^  of  them?  (Rom.  11:  9,  10.)  Does  he  apply 
the  tropical  language  of  it,  to  some  particular  kind  of 
suffering,  as  poverty,  for  example,  or  sickness  ?  Not  at 
all  ;  but  plainly  teaches  us,  that  the  language  of  the 
Psalmist  metms  generally  to  express  the  imprecation, 
Let  the  enemies  of  God  he  wretched  ! 

But  still,  in  translating  passages  of  this  nature,  it  is 
not  enough  to  give  the  sense  in  general.  We  must  pre- 
sent the  same  images  as  the  author  does,  and  of  course 
express  his  words.'  If  we  neglect  to  do  this,  our  read- 
ers may  indeed  know,  in  general,  the  meaning  of  the 
author  ;  but  they  will  remain  ignorant  of  what  language 
he  employs,  and  how  much  force  and  ornament  he  ex- 
hibits. 

I  come  next  to  allegory,  or  where  similitudes  are 
employed  for  the  sake  of  illustration.  The  use  which 
we  should  make  of  allegories  in  interpretation,  is,  to 
deduce  from  them  the  general  sentiment,  in  which  is 
summarily  and  properly  contained,  that  which  the  wri- 
ter wished  to  illustrate  by  his  similitudes.  In  explain- 
ing allegories,  it  is  surely  proper  to  have  respect  to  the 
design  of  the  author  in  writing  them.  But  all  men, 
who  make  use  of  allegories,  expect  their  readers  to  re- 
gard the  general  sentiment  inculcated  by  them,  rather 
than  the  similitudes  themselves  ;  or,  which  amounts 
to  the  same  thing,  not  to  dwell  upon  the  language  mere- 
ly, but  to  consider  the  design  of  it.  For  example  ; 
When  Christ  was  asked  why  he  did  not  enjoin  it  upon 
his  disciples  oftener  to  fast,  according  to  his  usual  cus- 
tom ;  he  answered  by  allegories,  using  these  three 
similitudes,  viz,that  while  the  bridegroom  was  present,  it 
was  not  proper  for  the  wedding-guests  to  be  sad  ;  that 
a  new  patch  should  not  be  sewed  upon  an  old  garment; 
and  that  new  wine  should  not  be  put  into  old  bottles. 
(Matt.  9  :  14 — 18.)  In  these  similitudes,  is  doubtless 
contained  one  general  sentiment,  which  being  under- 
stood, the  force  of  Jesus'  reply  is  manifest.  That  senti- 
ment, as  it  appears  to  me,  i:i  this  ;  that  no  one  in  common 
life  is  wont  to  do  those  things^  which  are  incongruous  with 


108  MORUS    ON    TRANSLATION. 

the  iime^  place^  and  occasion.  For  if  any  one  should  be 
sad  at  a  wedding  feast,  or  put  new  wine  into  old  bottles, 
or  sew  a  new  patch  upon  an  old  garment,  would  he  not 
act  foolishly,  and  be  regarded  as  one  destitute  of  a  sense 
of  propriety  ?  It  is  as  much  as  to  say,  in  common  life  such 
things  are  incongruous.  Whether,  therefore,  we  advert 
to  all  these  similitudes,  or  only  to  one  of  them,  the  same 
meaning  is,  and  ought  to  be,  deduced  from  the  passage. 

The  amount  of  the  whole  is,  that  Christ  being  asked 
why  he  permitted  his  disciples  so  much  indulgence  irt 
regard  to  fasting,  replied,  by  making  use  of  similies,  to 
shew  that  no  one  in  common  life  would  do  that  which  is  in- 
congruous ;  and  therefore,  he  would  not  compel  his  dis- 
ciples to  do  that,  which  neither  the  time  nor  the  occa- 
sion required.  For  certainly  it  would  have  been  incon- 
gruous for  the  disciples,  while  Christ  was  with  them  as 
their  guide  and  teacher,  to  spend  their  life  in  sadness, 
and  to  devote  themselves  to  rites  of  this  nature  ;  espe- 
cially when  Christ  was  soon  to  be  taken  from  them,  and 
they  were  to  be  assailed  by  many  calamities  and  dis- 
tresses. Now  if  Christ,  who  knew  this  would  be  their 
lot,  had  forbidden  them  their  present  enjoyments,  and 
prematurely  loaded  them  with  burdensome  rites,  which 
were  incongruous  with  their  present  circumstances,  and 
with  the  indulgence  of  his  affection  for  them,  he  would 
have  done  that,  which  would  be  like  being  sad  at  a 
wedding-feast,  or  sewing  a  new  patch  upon  an  old  gar- 
ment, or  putting  new  wine  into  old  bottles,  i.  e.  he 
would  have  done  an  incongruous,  unseemly  thing. 

But  he,  who,  overlooking  the  fact  that  so  many  words 
are  employed  in  the  designation  of  one  general  senti- 
ment, thinks  this  mode  of  explanation  does  not  exhaust 
the  whole  meaning  of  the  similies,  will,  after  the  man- 
ner of  many  ancient  and  modern  expositors,  explain 
every  part  ijy  itself;  so  that  the  bridegroom  is  made  the 
husband  of  the  church,  the  wine  is  the  gospel,  the  old 
and  the  new  are  Pharisaical  and  Christian  doctrine,  &c. 
For  myself,  I  am  wont  to  follow  the  usage  of  common 
life,  in  explaining  similitudes ;  for  this  is   the  voice  of 


MORUS  ON  TRANSLATION.  109 

nature,  and  can  easily  be  known,  from  the  usual  method 
of  allegory,  fable,  and  simile.  I  could  wish  that  the 
language,  opinions,  and  customs  of  common  life,  were 
more  frequently  regarded  in  the  interpretation  of  an- 
cient authors. 

If  it  be  true,  that  whatever  pertains  to  the  art  of  ex- 
pression is  drawn  from  the  observation  of  nature  and 
common  life,  how  shall  we  judge  that  we  have  learned 
not  the  mere  opinions  and  speculations  of  others  about 
language,  but  the  real  art  of  language,  which  agrees 
with  the  practice  of  common  life,  unless  we  compare 
what  we  have  learned  with  the  results  of  common  and 
every  day's  experience  ?  If  it  be  true,  that  any  book  is 
simply  the  language  of  the  author  as  it  were  addressed 
to  us,  can  we  persuade  ourselves  that  we  have  attained 
the  sense  of  it,  if,  when  we  read  it,  we  construe  every 
thing  in  a  different  manner  from  what  we  should,  had 
we  heard  it  spoken  ?  If  we  understand  language,  against 
all  the  usages  of  common  life  ?  If  we  seek  in  the  very 
syllables  of  a  writer  mountains  of  sense^  which  no  one,  in 
the  language  of  common  life,  looks  for  or  suspects  ?  If 
we  deny  to  an  author  the  right  of  being  reasonably 
construed,  and  not  to  have  his  words  urged  beyond  their 
proper  bounds^  a  thing  we  always  concede  in  conver- 
sation, and  which  is  indeed  a  fundamental  rule  of  ex- 
plaining language  that  is  spoken  ?  If  we  suppose  an 
author  to  have  written  merely  to  afford  us  an  occasion 
of  indulging  our  ingenuity,  and  while  he  walks  upon  the 
earth,  to  mount  ourselves  upon  the  clouds  ?  Only  think 
how  many  errors,  phantasies,  and  difficulties  have  been 
introduced,  by  those,  for  example,  who  have  comment- 
ed on  the  ancient  poets,  and  setting  nature  at  defiance 
as  exhibited  in  common  life,  have  undertaken  to  inter- 
pret from  their  own  fancy  !  How  much  grave  wisdom 
has  been  obtruded  upon  Homer,  against  his  will,  where 
his  words  breathed  simple  nature  and  common  life ! 
Think  with  what  anxiety  of  mind  many  have  handled  the 
sacred  writings,  while  they  seemed  to  forget,  that  al- 
though the  authors  were  inspired,  yet  they  were  men, 
10 


no  MORUS  ON  TRANSLATION. 

they  used  human  language,  and  so  wrote  it,  that  others 
for  whom    it   was  designed    could  understand  it  in  the 
usual  way,  that  is  by  the  application  to  it  of  their  know- 
ledge  of  the  idiom  in  which  it  was  composed.     It  may 
happen,  indeed,  that  pursuing  this  plain  beaten  path  we 
may  seem  to  be  unlearned,  because  we  do  not  profess  to 
know  all  which  others  think  they  know  ;  but  we  shall 
be  more  than  compensated  by  the  abundant  satisfaction 
of  having  every  thing  around  us,  all  that  common   life 
comprizes,  testifying  in  our  favour,  and  that  the  mean- 
ing of  language  must  be  scanned  by  the  rules  which  we 
have  brought  to  view.      Some  perhaps  may  think  too, 
that  we  do  not  exhibit  much   modesty  or  diffidence    in 
regard  to  the  sacred  books,  and  that  we  are   too  liberal 
and  studious  of  neology.     Still,  our  satisfaction  will  be 
very  great,  if  the  reasons  of  our  interpretation  depend 
on  precepts  drawn  from  common  life  and  usage,  which 
carry  along  with  them  a  convincing  weight  of  evidence 
in  their  favour,  and  are  not  repugnant  to  the  nature  and 
genius  of  all  languages.     Such    incongruous  principles, 
Turretine  has  very  ably  refuted,   in  his  book,  De  Sac. 
Script,  inter pretatione,      I   do  not   mean    to    say,    that 
acuteness  or  subtilty  in  philology  is  to  be  neglected. 
By  no  means  ;  for  without   these,    no  doctrine  can  be 
well  understood.     He  who  heaps  together  much,  is  not 
therefore  a  learned  man  ;  but  he  who  arranges,  defines, 
fortifies  with  arguments.     Who  would  be  satisfied  with 
being  deprived  of  all  the  advantages  of  subtilty,  or  nice 
discrimination,  which  enables  us  more  certainly,  briefly, 
clearly,  and  orderly  to   learn  any  thing  ?     But    when 
we  have  so  learned  it,  all  is  to    be  brought  to  the  test 
of  common  life,  so  that  it  may  appear  what  we  have 
learned  for  ourselves,  what  for  others  ;  what  for  the 
schools,  and  what  for  every  day's  use. 

[As  related  to  the  general  subject  of  translating,  and  specially 
of  trans] atins:  the  New  Testament,  the  reader  will  not  fail  to 
compare  with  the  above  remarks,  Campbell's  excellent  observa- 
tions, comprized  in  the  Preliminary  Dissertations  to  his  Transla- 
tion of  the  Gospels,  Diss.  II.  VIII.  X.] 


GENERAL  RULES  OF  CRITICISM,  111 


PART  IV. 


GENERAL    RULES    OF    CRITICISM    IN     RESPECT    TO    THE    NEW 
TESTAMENT. 

[Translated  from  Beckii  Monogramnaata  Hermeneutiees  Li- 
brorum  Nov.  Testanaenti,  edit.  1803,  Lipsiae,  Sectio  III.  pp. 
117,  &;c.] 

§  1.  Criticism  is  divided  into  lower  and  higher^  (terms 
not  altogether  adapted  to  express  a  proper  division  of 
it;)  each  of  which  is  again  subdivided  into  grarnmatico' 
historical^  and  conjectural. 

§  2.  The  authenticity  of  a  book,  the  genuineness  of 
a  passage,  and  the  goodness  of  a  particular  reading, 
are  established  by  arguments  external  and  internal.  The 
latter  kind  of  arguments  are  deduced  from  the  nature 
of  things  treated  of,  the  sentiments,  and  the  language. 

§  3.  Lower  or  verbal  criticism  is  regulated  by  the  fol- 
lowing general  principles;  viz,  That  reading  is  prefera- 
ble, respecting  which  it  may  be  probably  shewn,  that  it 
bears  the  stamp  of  the  author,  and  from  which  it  may 
appear  that  all  the  varieties  of  readings  have  proceeded. 
Hence  all  the  errors  of  copyists  should  be  noted;  as 
they  often  furnish  means  of  finding  out  the  true  reading 
and  the  origin  of  various  readings. 

§  4.  Common  laws  of  lower  criticism^  zvhich  apply  to 
books  in  general^  whether  sacred  or  profane, 

1.  That  reading  is  to  be  regarded  as  true,  which  is 
supported  by  far  the  greater  number  of  copies  and  wit- 
nesses. 

But  still,  readings  supported  by  a  few  books  are  not 


112  GENERAL  RULES  OF  CRITICISM 

entirely  to  be  disregarded ;  [specially   when  they  har- 
monize with  the  usus  loquendi  of  the  author.] 

2.  That  reading  which  the  better  copies  exhibit,  un- 
less special  reasons  prohibit  it,  is  to  be  preferred  to  the 
one  which  thepoorer  copies  exhibit,  although  most  nu- 
merous. What  copies  are  of  the  better  knid,  is  a  ques- 
tion to  be  discussed  in  another  place,  where  inquiry  is 
made  respecting  the  genius  of  the  N.  Test,  writings. 
Neither  the  antiquity  nor  propriety  of  a  reading,  solely 
considered,  always  proves  it  to  be  a  true  one  ;  [unless 
the  antiquity  should  extend  back  to  the  autograph  ;  or 
the  propriety  should  be  shewn  to  be  exclusive.] 

3.  That  reading  which  is  more  harsh,  obscure,  diffi- 
cult, unusual,  or  delicately  chosen,  if  supported  by  the 
authority  of  a  proper  witness,  is  preferable  to  one  which 
is  plain,  easy,  usual,  and  common.  Difficulty  sometimes 
exists  in  respect  to  a  whole  passage,  and  its  connexion  ; 
sometimes  in  regard  to  the  ambiguity  of  particular 
words  and  phrases ;  sometimes  in  respect  to  the  gram- 
matical forms,  historical  and  doctrinal  passages,  Sic. 
But 

4.  That  reading  which  approaches  nearest  to  the 
popular  and  famihar  method  of  speaking,  if  it  be  sup- 
ported by  external  testimonies,  is  preferable  to  one 
more  artificial  and  subtile. 

5.  The  shorter  reading,  when  supported  by  testimo- 
ny of  importance,  and  not  incongruous  with  the  style 
and  design  of  the  writer,  is  preferable  to  a  more  verbose 
one.  Still  there  are  eases,  where  the  more  copious 
reading  is  to  be  preferred. 

6.  That  reading  which  gives  the  best  sense,  is  pecu- 
liarly preferable.  But  to  determine  this,  the  nature  of 
the  whole  passage,  the  genius  of  the  writer,  and  not  the 
mere  opinions  and  sentiments  of  particular  interpreters, 
are  to  be  consulted 

7.  The  reading  which  produces  a  worthless  or  an  in- 
congruous sense,  is  to  be  rejected.  Good  care  however 
must  be  taken,  not  to  condemn  a  reading  as  worthless 
or  incongruous,  which  a  more  correct  grammatical  and 


IN  RESPECT  TO  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT.  113 

historical  investigation  would  prove  to  be  a  true  read- 
ing", or  at  least  a  probable  one. 

8.  A  reading  which  agrees  with  the  usus  loquendi  of 
the  writer,  is  preferable  to  that  which  disagrees  with 
it.  It  must  be  remembered,  in  judging  here,  that  the 
style  of  an  author  sometimes  varies,  with  increasing 
age. 

9.  A  reading  is  to  be  rejected,  in  respect  to  which 
plain  evidence  is  found,  that  it  has  undergone  a  design- 
ed alteration.  Such  alteration  may  have  taken  place,(a) 
From  doctrinal  reasons.  (6)From  moral  and  practical 
reasons. (g)  From  historical  and  geographical  doubts; 
Matt.  8  :  28,  comp.  Mark  5:1.  {d)From  the  desire  of 
reconciling  passages  apparently  inconsistent  with  each 
other.  (e)From  desire  to  make  the  discourse  more  in- 
tensive. Hence  many  emphatic  readings  have  originat- 
ed. (/) From  the  comparison  of  many  MSS,  the  readings 

*of  which  have  been  amalgamated.    (^)From  a  compari- 
son of  parallel  passages. 

Corrections  of  the  more  celebrated  MSS.  have  been 
sometimes  detected. 

10.  Various  readings  are  to  be  rejected^  which  spring 
from  the  mere  negligence  of  copyists,  and  from  those 
errors,  which  are  very  common  in  all  kinds  of  books. 
To  these  belong,  (rt)The  commutation  of  forms  in  the 
Macedonico-Alexandrine  dialect,  and  also  other  unusu- 
al forms,  for  those  of  the  common  dialect.  The  Alex- 
andrine and  common  forms,  however,  have  the  prefer- 
ence over  others  in  the  New  Testament ;  and  the 
Alexandrine  dialect  itself  also  admitted  some  Attic 
forms.  (6)The  commutation  of  single  letters  and  sylla- 
bles, by  an  error  of  either  the  eye  or  the  ear ;  the 
former  resulting  from  obscure  and  compendious  meth- 
ods of  writing,  [the  latter,  from  copying  after  the  read- 
ing of  one,  who  was  misunderstood,  or  who  read  erro- 
neously.] (c)  The  commutation  of  synonymes.  (c^)Froaa 
transferring  into  the  text,  words  written  in  the  margin 
of  copies,  and  thus  uniting  both  readings,  James  V. 
2.    (e)From  the  omission  of  a  word  or   a  verse,  by  an 

10* 


114  OExVERAL  RULES  Of   CRITICISM 

error  of  (he  sight.  (/)From  the  transposition  of  words 
and  passages-,  whence  it  may  have  happened,  that  some 
error  has  crept  into  most  of  our  books.  (g)From  words 
which  ended  with  the  like  sound,  or  appeared  alike  ; 
and  from  proximate  words,  one  ending  and  the  other 
beginning  with  the  same  syllable.  (/i)From  incorreclty 
uniting  or  separating  words  ;  which  naturally  resulted, 
in  some  cases,  from  the  ancient  method  of  continuous 
writing.  (i)From  an  erroneous  interpunction  and  dis- 
tinction of  passages. 

11.  A  reading  is  to  be  rejected,  which  plainly  be- 
trays a  gloss  or  interpretation.  This  may  be  a  word 
or  a  whole  passage.  Sometimes  these  glosses  are  unit- 
ed to  the  true  text,  and  sometimes  they  have  thrust  it 
out.  Not  all  interpretations,  however,  are  spurious 
glosses  ;  [for  authors  themselves  sometimes  add  them, 
in  order  to  explain  their  own  language.] 

12.  Readings  deduced  from  versions  or  the  commen- 
taries of  interpreters,  are  to  be  rejected.  In  judging  of 
them,  however,  great  prudence  and  much  skill  is  neces- 
sary. 

[The  maxims,  thus  far,  are  comprized  within  the  province  of 
lower  criticism.  But  higher  criticism  may  be,  and  ought  to  be 
employed,  in  order  to  assist  in  lorming  a  judgment  of  the  genu- 
ineness of  many  passages.  Here  follows  from  the  same  writer, 
a  Synopsis  of  the] 

§  5.  Laws  of  higher  criticism^  respecting  the  establish- 
ment of  a  pure  text. 

1.  The  sentiment,  declaration,  passage,  book,  or 
part  of  a  book  of  an}'  author,  which  on  account  of  its 
nature,  form,  method,  subject,  or  arguments,  does  not 
appear  to  have  originated  from  him,  is  either  spurious, 
or  at  least  very  much  to  be  suspected. 

Imitations  of  authors,  made  with  design,  or  for  the 
sake  of  practice  in  writing,  or  from  other  reasons,  may 
easily  be  ascribed  to  the  a.uthors  tliemselves,  though 
they  are  supposititious. 

2.  A  passage  which  manifestly  disagrees  with  the  na- 
ture and  connexion  of  the  context,  and  interrupts!  it,  is 
to  be  regarded  as  spurious. 


IN  RESPECT  TO  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT.       1  1 5 

3.  A  passage  which  appears  in  another  place,  either 
in  the  same  words  or  with  little  variation,  and  seems  to 
be  more  properly  and  commodioiisly  placed  there, 
may  be  suspected  of  having  been  transferred  to  the 
place  where  it  stands  with  less  propriety,  and  may  be 
removed  from  thence. 

But  here  great  care  is  requisite,  lest  we  judge  rash- 
ly, or  form  our  opinion  rather  from  the  taste  and  style 
of  the  present  day,  than  from  the  genius  of  the  author, 
his  design  and  style,  or  the  subject  and  argument  of  the 
discourse.  As  an  example,  one  might  appeal  to  the 
disputations  about  the  Apocalypse,  and  to  the  x\ppendix 
of  John's  Gospel  in  chap.  XXI. 

4.  Passages  which  are  manifestly  interpolated,  by  the 
comments  of  interpreteis  or  from  any  other  cause,  are 
to  be  rejected  from  the  text. 

But  great  caution  is  necessary  here,  to  judge  rightly. 
In  general,  internal  arguments  alone  are  not  to  be  relied 
on,  as  sufficient  evidence. 

5.  Parts  of  books,  which  appear  incoherent,  and  yet 
clearly  exhibit  the  genius  and  style  of  the  author,  may 
be  reduced  to  better  order,  by  separation,  and  making 
a  different  arrangement.  [Great  caution  here  too  is 
necessary.] 

6.  If  numerous  and  very  diverse  readings  of  a  book 
are  found  in  the  best  copies,  we  may  conclude,  either 
that  the  book  has  gradually  received  various  accessions, 
or  has  been  re-published  by  a  later  hand,  or  has  been 
edited  a  second  time  by  the  author,  and  corrected,  so 
as  to  give  occasions  for  the  introduction  of  such  various 
readings. 

§  6.  Laws  proper  to  guide  our  judgment,  in  respect 
to  the  true  reading  of  passages  in  the  New  Testament, 
spurious  additions,  the  books  themselves,  or  the  au- 
thors of  them,  may  be  deduced  from  the  peculiar  nature 
of  the  things  described,  and  the  style  of  the  books. 
They  may  also  be  deduced  from  the  nature  of  the 
sources,  whence  the  various  readings  come,  and  from 
the  testimony  of  witnesses.     Such  are  the  following. 


116  GENERAL  RULES  OF  CRITICISM 

1.  Passages  are  to  be  regarded  as  spurious,  at  least 
are  to  be  suspected,  (if  any  such  there  are,)  whioh  dis- 
agree with  the  nature  of  the  Christian  religion,  the  his- 
tory of  it,  or  the  mode  of  teaching  and  deciding  appro- 
priate to  any  sacred  writer  ;  or  if  they  appear  trifling, 
inapt,  or  jejune,  when  compared  with  the  force  of  the 
doctrine  exhibited,  or  the  gravity  of  the  author  who 
exhibits  it.  Specially  are  they  to  be  suspected,  if  his- 
torical reasons  concur  to  render  them  suspicious. 

The  importance  of  subjects,  the  force  of  precepts 
and  narrations,  and  other  things  of  this  nature,  are  to  be 
estimated  by  the  manner,  judgment,  and  usage  of  those 
times,  in  which  the  books  were  written.  In  judging  of 
doctrines,  special  caution  is  to  be  used. 

We  must  be  watchful  against  the  pious  frauds  (as  they 
are  called)  of  ancient  Churches,  committed  in  the  in- 
terpolation of  books,  and  in  giving  new  forms  to  pas- 
sages of  them.  The  special  causes  of  interpolations 
were  tradition,  apocryphal  writings,  the  desire  of  ex- 
plaining, augmenting,  correcting,  &c.  On  the  other 
hand,  some  passages  were  ejected  as  spurious,  which 
seemed  to  be  unworthy  of  the  authors  of  them.  E.  g. 
Luke  22  :  43,  vide  Paulus,  Commentary,  p.  613. 

2.  In  general,  the  reading  which  savours  of  Hebra- 
ism or  Syro-Chaldaism,  is  preferable  to  that  which  sa- 
vours of  classical  Greek.  [Ceteris  paribus^  it  is  always 
preferable.] 

Some  of  the  writers  of  the  New  Testament,  however, 
as  Paul  and  Luke,  approach  negrer  to  the  Greek  style. 

The  conjecture  of  some  critics,  that  the  books  of  the 
New  Testament  were  originally  written,  for  the  most 
part,  in  Syro-Chaldaic,  and  afterwards  were  translated 
into  Greek,  by  an  interpreter  who  has  committed  many 
errors,  can,  at  most,  be  extended  to  but  very  few  books. 

3.  Since  the  New  Testament  was  commonly  used, 
both  in  public  and  private,  and  certain  parts  of  it  were 
selected  for  ecclesiastical  use,  inquiry  must  be  made, 
whether  any  portion  of  it  has  bet^n  interpolated,  either 
from  the  parallel  pa^^sages  of  the  Old  Testament,  or 
from  the  Church  Lectionaries. 


IN  RESPECT  TO  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT.  117 

4.  As  many  copies,  versions,  and  fathers  of  the  an- 
cient Churches,  are  found  nearly  always  to  have  fol- 
lowed the  same  text,  those  which  belong  to  the  same 
class  are  not  to  be  separately  numbered,  but  rather  to 
be  regarded  as  standing  ift  the  place  of  one  witness.  Still 
less  are  we  to  trust  solely  to  any  one  copy,  however  an- 
cient, critical,  or  carefully  written.  JNor  is  any  copy, 
which  may  be  erroneously  written,  or  recent,  or  occa- 
sionally interpolated,  to  be  rejected  as  altogether  use- 
less. 

5'.  In  respect  to  any  reading,  the  first  inquiry  is.  To 
what  recension  or  edition  does  it  belong  ? 

The  age  and  country  of  copies  and  readings,  is  to  be 
examined  by  careful  comparison. 

No  copy  extant  is  perfectly  free  from  error  in  all  the 
books,  or  uniformly  follows  any  one  uncorrupted  recen- 
sion. We  must  judge,  therefore,  from  the  consent  of 
many  things  of  the  same  kind,  and  from  internal  evi- 
dence, what  recension  is  followed,  either  generally,  or 
in  particular  passages.  Some  copies  are  thought  to  fol- 
low various  recensions  in  particular  parts.  A  few  cop- 
ies of  the  most  ancient  classes  of  manuscripts  are  ex- 
tant ;  but  the  majority  of  copies  are  more  modern.  If 
an  ancient  copy  has  been  propagated  through  many  edi- 
tions, it  may  have  been  exposed  to  vary  from  the  an- 
cient recension,  or  have  been  corrupted  by  new  er- 
rors.of  the  copyist,  more  than  if  a  recent  copy  were 
directly  taken  from  the  ancient  one. 

6.  That  reading  in  which  all  the  recensions  of  the 
best  copies  agree,  is  the  most  correct,  certainly  the 
most  ancient.     Slight  deviations  are  unimportant. 

7.  Readings  supported  by  the  authority  of  the  most 
ancient  classes  of  mannscripts,  and  of  the  more  credi- 
ble witnesses,  are  to  be  preferred  to  others.  But  a  re- 
gard must  be  had  to  the  internal  goodness  of  a  copy. 

8.  The  Alexandrine  class  of  manuscripts  is  sometimes 
preferable  to  the  occidental,  and  sometimes  of  less  au- 
thority. In  the  conflicting  claims  of  various  classes, 
special  regard  must  be  had  to  historical  and  internal 
means  of  judging  of  a  reading. 


118  GENERAL  RULES  OF    CRITICISM 

9.  Manuscripts  are  of  the  highest  authority  ;  but  nei- 
ther the  ancient  versions,  nor  the  exegetical  and  other 
books  of  the  Fathers  are  to  be  neglected. 

10.  In  collecting  and  judging  of  the  ancient  versions, 
(I)  Regard  must  be  had  to  those  made  directly  from 
the  Greek.  Among  these,  the  Latin,  Syriac,  and  Goth- 
ic deserve  special  mention.  (2)  We  must  use  a  cor- 
rected text  of  these  Versions.  (3)  We  must  inquire 
whether  the  translator  has  rendered  literally  or  ad  sen- 
sum ;  whether  the  errors  in  the  version  arise  from  the 
fault  of  the  translator's  copy,  or  from  other  causes ; 
and  finally  whether  the  version  has  been  corrected  or 
not.  (4)  Those  versions,  which  from  comparison  are 
found  to  belong  to  the  same  family  of  manuscripts,  are 
to  be  regarded  as  standing  in  the  place  of  one  ancient 
witness.  (5)  No  reading  derived  merely  from  versions, 
and  destitute  of  other  support,  can  be  received  ;  but  the 
consent  of  all  the  ancient  v6rsions  and  fathers  in  a  par- 
ticular reading,  which  varies  from  that  of  manuscripts, 
renders  the  latter  suspicious. 

11.  In  regard  to  the  readings  derived  from  the  writ- 
ers of  the  ancient  churches,  we  must  see  (1)  That  they 
are  drawn  from  a  correct  and  not  a  corrupt  edition  of 
the  Fathers.  (2)  We  must  diligently  consider  the  au- 
thors, their  descent,  age,  erudition,  subtilty  of  judging, 
temerity  in  emendation,  the  nature  of  the  copies  which 
they  used,  and  the  creed  of  the  churches  to  which  they 
belonged.  (3^  We  must  consider,  in  what  kind  of  book 
or  passage  or  ecclesiastical  writers,  various  readings 
are  found.  (4.)  Inquiry  must  be  made,  whether  the  vari- 
ations are  supported  by  real  and  direct  testimony  of  the 
fathers ;  or  whether  changes  were  occasioned  in  the 
text  by  lapse  of  memory,  or  a  designed  accommoda- 
tion ;  or  whether  merely  opinions  or  conjectures  are 
proposed.  It  seems  to  be  very  unjust  to  ascribe  all  the 
variety  found  in  the  ecclesiastical  fathers,  either  to  er- 
ror of  the  memory,  or  to  temerity  in  accommodation, 
or  a  fondness  for  emendation.  (5.)  The  omission  of 
some  passage,  in  the  Commentaries  of  the  Fathers,  does 
not  always  shew  that  it  was  wanting,  in  the  copy  which 


IN  RESPECT  TO  THE   NEW  TESTEMENT.  119 

the  writer  had.    Silence  however,  concerning  an  impor- 
tant passage,  renders  it  suspicious. 

12.  The  fragments  of  heretical  writings  are  not  to 
be  overlooked,  in  the  search  for  various  readings  ;  for 
the  supposition  is  rash,  that  they  generally  corrupted 
the  text  of  all  parts  of  the  sacred  writings. 

13.  That  interpunction,  and  distinction  of  verses  and 
chapters,  which  is  most  consonant  with  the  argument, 
sentiments,  connexion  of  discourse,  and  usus  loquendi  of 
the  sacred  writers,  is  to  be  regarded  as  the  best. 

§  6.  In  the  criticism  of  all  ancient  books,  it  is  well 
understood,  that  particular  readings  are  not  required  to 
be  established  by  most  certain  and  irrefragable  argu- 
ments, but  only  that  a  probability  be  shewn  that  they 
approximate,  at  least,  very  near  to  the  original  read- 
ings ;  and  the  judgment  is  to  be  made  up,  in  view  of 
what  appears  to  be  most  probable.  So  in  respect  to 
the  New  Testament ;  no  more  should  be  required  than 
can,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  be  performed.  Every 
thing  on  all  sides  should  be  considered,  before  the 
judgment  is  made  up.  And  if,  in  judging  of  the  text  of 
profane  authors,  gravity  and  modesty  are  rightly  com- 
mended ;  surely  in  judging  of  the  sacred  books,  we  oiight 
most  scrupulously  to  abstain  from  all  rashness  and  levi- 
ty, as  well  as  from  all  favoritism  and*  superstition. 


PART  V. 

CHAPTER  I. 

ON  THE  QUALIFICATIONS  OF  AN  INTERPRETER. 

[The  followinff  Chapter  is  extracted  from  KeiPs  Elementa  Her- 
meneutices,  translated  from  the  orig^inhl  O'einjan  into  l.atin  by 
C.  A.  G.  Emmerling,  and  published  at  Leipzick  in  1811.  Although 
it  contains  several  things  that  seem  to  be  a  repetition  of  the  ideas 
advanced  in  various  places  hy  Ernesti.  as  exhibileJ  in  the  fore- 
going pages  ;  yet  as  the  object  is  lo  describe  the  qualifications  of 


120  ON    THE  QUALIFICATIONS 

the  interpreter  himself^  in  respect  to  knowledge^  and  as  it  is  a  very 
brief  and  well  digested  summary,  it  appears  desirable  that  the 
student,  who  aspires  to  the  place  of  an  interpreter,  should  have 
the  qualifications  of  one  definitely  and  separately  described,  as 
here,  in  order  that  he  may  direct  his  special  attention  to  this  sub- 
ject, unembarrassed  by  other  considerations.] 

§  1.  He  who  desires  to  understand  and  interpret  the 
books  of  the  New  Testament,  must,^r5^  of  all^  acquire 
some  historic  knowledge  of  the  author  of  each  book  ; 
of  the  state  of  things  existing  when  it  was  written  ;  of 
the  body  or  collection  of  the  New  Testament  books ;  of 
the  particular  history  of  its  ancient  versions,  editions, 
and  parts  in  which  it  was  written  ;  and  other  things  of 
this  nature.  To  this  must  be  added  a  knowledge  of  the 
principles  of  criticism,  in  respect  to  the  text  of  the  New 
Testament. 

Books  to  be  read  for  information  on  these  topics :  Marsh's  trans- 
lation of  Michaelis'  Introduct.  to  the  N.  Test.;  and  Haenlein 
Handbuch  der  Einleitung  in  die  Schriften  des  N.  Testaments. 

§  2.  Of  the  second  kind  of  knowledge^  preparatory  to 
the  understanding  and  interpretation  of  the  JY,  Testament, 

(1)  The  interpreter  must  understand  the  language  in 
which  the  books  are  written.  As  the  diction  is  not  pure 
classic  Greek,  but  the  Hebrew  idiom  here  and  there  in- 
termixed with  classic  Greek,  and  as  vestiges  of  the  Chal- 
dee,  Sj^iac,  Rabbinic  and  Latin  languages  occur  ;  it  fol- 
lows, of  course,  that  the  interpreter  should  not  only  be 
acquainted  with  pure  Greek,  but  with  its  various  dia- 
lects, specially  the  Alexandrine.  Above  all,  he  ought 
to  be  well  versed  in  the  Hebrew,  Chaldee,  Syriac,  Rab- 
binic, and  Latin  idioms. 

Vorstius  de  Hebraismis  N.  Test.,  cura  Fischeri.  1778.  Leus- 
den  de  Dialectis  N.  Test.  edit.  Fischeri.  1792.  Maltaire  Dc  Di- 
alectis.  Ling.  Graec.  Sturtz  De  Dialecto.  Macedonica  et  Alex- 
andrina,  1808.  Pfannkuche,  Ueber  die  Palaestinische  Landes- 
sprache  in  dem  Zeitalter  Christi ;  im  Eichhorn's  Allgemeine 
Bibliothek,  B.  viii.  s.365,  &c. 

(2.)  The  interpreter  mtist  possess  a  knowledge  of  the  things^ 
respecting  which  the  books  treat.  These  are  partly  his- 
torical^ and  partly  doctrinal.  The  explanation  of  them 
must  be  sought,  primarily,  from  the  books  themselves  ; 


OF  AN  INTERPRETER.  121 

and,  secondarily,  from  those  writings  of  more  recent  au- 
thors, which  may  be  subsidiary  to  the  attainment  of  this 
knowledge. 

§  3.  As  to  the  historic  matter  of  these  books.  It  is  of 
great  importance  to  the  interpreter  to  be  well  versed 
in  sacred  geography,  chronology,  civil  history,  and  ar- 
chaeology ,'  i.  e.  to  understand  those  things  which  re- 
spect the  situation  and  climate  of  the  countries,  where 
the  events  referred  to  happened  ;  as  well  as  those  which 
serve  to  define  the  times  when  they  happened  ;  and  al- 
so the  history  of  the  nation  among  whom  they  took 
place,  and  of  other  nations  mentioned  in  this  his- 
tory, with  their  condition,  manners,  and  customs. 

(1)  Geographical  knowledge.  The  geography  of  Pal- 
estine and  the  neighbouring  countries  should  be  well 
understood,  (a)  as  also  their  natural  productions,  (b) 
To  this  must  be  added  a  knowledge  of  many  countries 
in  Asia,  and  of  some  in  Europe  ;  also  of  the  Roman  em- 
pire, as  it  then  existed,  divided  into  provinces. 

a)  Wells'  Sacred  Geography.  Relandi  Palaestina.  Bachiene 
histor,  und  geograph.  Beschreibung  von  Palaestina,  Tom.  vii. 
8vo.  1766.  Hamelsfeldt  biblische  Geographic,  3  Theile.  1796. 
Specially,  Bellerman's  biblical  Geography,  now  in  the  course  of 
translation  by  Messrs.  R.  C.  Morse  and  James  Marsh,  Alumni  of 
the  Theol.  Sem.  at  Andover ;  a  classical  and  excellent  work. 

6)  Celsii  Hierobotanicon,  1745.  Bocharti  Hierozoicon,  edit. 
Rosenmueller,  1776.  Tom.  iii.  Supp.  to  Calmet's  Dictionary, 
Vols,  iii — V.     Harmar's  Observations  edited  by  A.  Clarke. 

(2)  Chronology,  The  interpreter  should  have  not  on- 
ly a  knowledge  of  technical  chronology,  but  of  the  Ro- 
man mode  of  reckoning  aburbe  condita^  and  of  the  Greek 
Olympiads  ;  (on  which  subjects  he  may  study  authors 
well  deserving  of  credit;)  but  in  respect  to  historical 
chronology,  he  should  know  in  what  order  of  time  the 
events  related  in  the  Old  Testament  happened  ;  when 
and  where  the  first  Roman  emperors,  the  various  kings 
and  princes  that  sprung  from  the  house  of  Herod  the 
Great,  the  Roman  Consuls  at  the  beginning  of  the  em- 
pire of  the  Caesars,  the  Jewish  high  priests  (and  the 
number  of  them)  in  our  Saviour's  time,  and  the  Roman 

11 


n 


ON  THE  QUALIFICATIONS 


magistrates,  specially  in  the  provinces  of  Syria  and  Ju- 
dea,  succeeded  each  other. 

Petavii  Opus  de  doctrina  temporum,  1703.  Scaliger  de  emen- 
datione  temporum,  1629.  Usherii  Annales  Vet.  et  N.  Test. 
Franckii  Novum  Systeraa  Chronol.  fundamentalis.  Goelting.  1778. 

(3)  History  civil  and  Political.  In  regard  to  the  his- 
tory of  events  among  the  nations  mentioned  in  the  sa- 
cred books,  and  also  their  forms  of  government,  it  is 
important  for  the  interpreter  to  make  himself  acquaint- 
ed, ^r^^,  with  the  ancient  history  of  the  Jews.  In  study- 
ing this,  he  is  not  to  confine  himself  merely  to  the  Old 
Testament ;  he  must  also  consult  the  traditionary  ac- 
counts, which  were  extant  in  the  time  of  Christ  and  the 
Apostles,  (a)  Secondly^  he  must  study  the  history  of  the 
Jews  under  the  Herods,  and  that  of  these  princes. 
Thirdly^  the  condition  and  circumstances  of  the  Jews  in 
Palestine,  while  under  the  dominion  of  the  Romans  ;  and 
also  of  the  Jews  living  in  other  countries.  Finally,  the 
history  of  the  Roman  Emperors  at  that  period,  and  of 
the  Roman  Prefects  over  the  Asiatic  Provinces. 

a)  Shuckford's  Connexion.  Prideaux' Connexion.  Krebsius, 
Decreta  Romanorum  pro  Judaeis,  e  Joseph©  collecta,  1  vol.  8vo. 
1763.  Wesselingii  Diatribe  de  Judaeorum  Archontibus,  1  vol. 
8vo.  1738.  Benson^s  History  of  the  first  planting  of  the  Chris- 
tian religion.  Josephi  Opera,  edit.  Havercarapii.  Jahn,  Ge- 
schichte  der  Juden  in  Archaeologie  der  Hebraer,  Vol.  I. 

(4)  Manners  and  customs.  In  regard  to  these,  (a)  A 
knowledge  of  Hebrew  antiquities  in  general  is  necessa- 
ry. (6)  A  considerable  knowledge  of  the  Greek  and  Ro- 
man Antiquities,  (c)  A  knowledge  of  the  ecclesiastical 
rites  and  customs  of  the  primitive  churches  ;  both  those 
which  they  received  from  the  Hebrews,  and  others 
which  w^ere  introduced  by  Christians  themselves. 

Opera  Philonis  Alex,  et  Josephi.  Warneknos  Entwurf  der 
Heb.  Alterlhuemer,  1  vol.  8vo.  Specially,  Jahnii  Archaeologia 
Biblica  in  compendium  redacta,  now  in  a  course  of  translation 
by  Mr.  T.  C.  Upham,  an  Alumnus  of  the  Theol.  Sem.  at  Ando- 
ver,  and  soon,  it  is  hoped,  to  be  published,  for  the  use  of  biblical 
students  in  our  country  ;  a  vsrork,  which  combines  brevity  with 
perspicuity  and  good  order,  and  comprizes  the  substance  of  all 
the  preceding  publications  on  this  interesting  subject. 

Of  Roman  Antiquities,  Adams'  work  is  a  very  useful  Compend  ; 
and  of  the  Greek,  Potter  remains  not  only  the  best,  but  almost 


OF  AN  INTERPRETER.  1  23 

the  oniy  respectable  one.     Ecc.  .;4n^igfM^7^c5.  Bingham,  Orig.Ecc. 
Also  Roealer  Bibliothek,  der  Kircheavaetern. 

§  4.  Doctrinal  contents  of  the  sacred  books.  That  part 
of  the  New  Testament,  which  is  directly  concerned  with 
faith  and  practice,  will  be  rightly  understood,  when  the 
interpreter  rightly  understands  what  each  particular 
writer  has  inculcated.  As  there  are  many  passages 
which  relate  to  the  Jews  ;  and  as  the  writers  of  the  New 
Testament  and  their  first  readers  were  of  Jewish  ex- 
traction ;  it  will  be  important, 

(1)  To  know  the  sentiments  of  the  Jews  of  that  peri- 
od, in  regard  to  religion  ;  specially  of  those,  who  used 
the  Hebrew-Greek  dialect,  and  of  the  three  great  sects 
among  which  the  Jews  were  divided,  viz.  the  Pharisees, 
Sadducees,  and  Essenes. 

Joseph!  et  Philonis  Scripta.  An  admirable  view  of  Philo's 
Sentiments  has  been  published  by  Schreiter,  in  Analekten  der 
exeget.  Theologie,  Band  i.  ii.  Fabricii  Codex  Pseudepigraphus 
Vet.  Test.,  et  Codex  Apocryphus  Nov.  Test.  Grabii  Spicile- 
gium  Sanctt.  Patrum,  saec.  i.  ii.  iii.  2  vols.  8vo.  On  the  right 
use  of  these  sources,  see  Mori  Hermeneut.  Vol.  ii.  p.  172,  &c. 
Brettschneider,  systemat.  Darstellung  der  Dogmat.  und  Moral 
der  Apocryph.  Schriften  des  A.  Test.  1805.  Staeudlin,  Theulo- 
giae  Moralis  Ebraeorum  ante  Christum  Historia,  1794.  De  tri- 
bus  Judaeorum  Sectis,  delph.  1703,  4to.  comprizing  the  works  of 
Serrarius,  Drusius,  and  Scaliger,  on  this  subject. 

(2)  The  precepts  of  the  Christian  religion.  What  was 
adopted  from  the  Jewish  religion,  what  rejected,  and 
what  was  added  anew  to  Christianity,  must  be  understood 
in  order  to  explain  the  New  Testament  properly.  But 
knowledge  of  this  nature,  that  is  certain^  can  be  drawn 
only  from  the  sacred  writings  themselves. 

The  Biblical  Theology  of  Storr,  Reinhard,  Doederlein,  Zach- 
aria,  Leun,  Muntinghe,  (and  for  some  purposes,  of  Ammon  and 
Bauer,)  may  be  used  with  profit.  But  the  student  is  not  to  be 
guided  by  any  system,  except  so  far  as  the  author  shows  it  to  fee 
built  upon  a  satisfactory  interpretation  of  the  word  of  God. 
Flatt's  edition  of  Storr,  translated  into  German,  and  accompani- 
ed by  the  notes  of  the  Editor,  is  a  fundamental  book  in  the  study 
of  Biblical  Theology. 

(3)  The  doctrines  of  heretical  Sects*  It  is  important  to 
know  the  opinions  of  early  heretics,  because,  it  is  prob- 
able, some  passages  of  the  New  Testament  have  a  spe- 
cial reference  to  them. 


124  QUALIFICATIONS  OF  AN  INTERPRETER. 

The  best  book,  by  far,  is  Walch's  Entwurf  einer  vollstaend. 
Geschichte  der  Ketzereien,  Sic.  11  vols.  8vo.  Vol.  i.  contains  an 
account  of  the  earliest  heresies.  Titmanni  de  vestigiis  Gnosti- 
corum  in  Nov.  Test,  frustra  quaesitis,  will  well  repay  the  labour 
of  perusal. 

§  5.  In  enumerating  the  qualifications  of  an  inter- 
preter, we  must  not  omit  a  knowledge  of  grammar,  rhet- 
oric, and  philosophy. 

(1)  Grammar.  Not  only  a  general  knowledge  of  its 
principles  is  necessary,  but  also  a  special  technical 
knowledge  of  both  etymology  and  Syntax.  The  inter- 
preter must  be  acquainted  with  the  various  forms  of 
words,  and  understand  how  the  significations  are  con- 
nected with  the  forms  ;  he  must  understand  the  manner 
in  which  words  are  connected  in  a  sentence  ;  the  use  of 
the  particles;  and  also  of  the  grammatical  figures,  as 
they  are  called,  such  as  ellipsis  and  pleonasm. 

Vigerus,  de  idiotismis  Ling.  Graecae,  edit.  Hermann^  ISO'S. 
Hoogeveen,  Doctrina  partic.  Graec.  edit.  Schutz,  1806.  Bos, 
Ellipses  Graecae,  edit.Schaefer,1808.  Weiskii,  Pleonasmi  Grae- 
ci,  1807. 

(2)  Rhetoric.  A  knowledge  of  this  is  necessary,  not  so 
much  to  judge  of  rhetorical  figures,  as  to  find  out  the 
meaning  of  them,  or  the  sentiment  which  they  are  de- 
signed to  convey. 

(3)  A  knowledge  of  Philosophy.  Not  that  of  some  par- 
ticular school  or  sect  merely,  but  that  which  pertains 
to  the  cultivation  of  the  mental  powers,  and  to  nice  psy- 
chological discrimination.  Such  a  knowledge  is  requi- 
site, in  order  to  form  clear  conceptions  in  the  mind,  and 
accurately  to  define  our  ideas ;  to  discern  what  is  simi- 
lar in  different  things,  and  what  is  distinct;  to  judge  of 
the  connexion  of  thought  and  argument,  and  finally,  to 
qualify  one  perspicuously  to  represent  the  opinions  of 
an  author  to  others.  Great  caution,  however,  is  neces- 
sary here,  lest  the  interpreter  intrude  upon  his  author, 
his  own  particular  philosrphy. 

Ernesti,  Opuscula  Philol.  de  Vanitate  Philosophantium,  &e. 

FINIS. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 


Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


JUL    8  1979 


Jksc  '5C  p 


KETD     NOV  Z  3  1981 


o 

m 

ujU. 

p- 

CO 

CLi 

Cx:, 

o^ 

^ 

<x 

Ll. 

cr. 

o 

— J 

— J 

CJ 

C.T 

or 

Ll 

pi  1  5  I 


r3 


JUN  0119S6 
RECEIVED 

JUL  2  8  1996 

ctlRCULATION  DEPT. 


U.  C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDSbDflD14T 


E7£ 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAI^IFORNIA  LIBRARY 


m: 


m